EP3766550B1 - Front device - Google Patents
Front device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- EP3766550B1 EP3766550B1 EP20192634.2A EP20192634A EP3766550B1 EP 3766550 B1 EP3766550 B1 EP 3766550B1 EP 20192634 A EP20192634 A EP 20192634A EP 3766550 B1 EP3766550 B1 EP 3766550B1
- Authority
- EP
- European Patent Office
- Prior art keywords
- ski
- levers
- control
- moved
- lever
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Active
Links
- 239000013641 positive control Substances 0.000 claims description 109
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 claims description 105
- 238000013016 damping Methods 0.000 claims description 12
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 54
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 47
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 description 45
- 238000009739 binding Methods 0.000 description 45
- 238000007373 indentation Methods 0.000 description 22
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 17
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 12
- 229910000831 Steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 239000010959 steel Substances 0.000 description 11
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000036316 preload Effects 0.000 description 7
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000009194 climbing Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013270 controlled release Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000004809 Teflon Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920006362 Teflon® Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001174 ascending effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000035515 penetration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000284 resting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/22—Arrangements for adjusting the toe-clamps
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/08—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings
- A63C9/0807—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings for both towing and downhill skiing
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/08—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings
- A63C9/085—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings with sole hold-downs, e.g. swingable
- A63C9/08507—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings with sole hold-downs, e.g. swingable with a plurality of mobile jaws
- A63C9/08528—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings with sole hold-downs, e.g. swingable with a plurality of mobile jaws pivoting about a longitudinal axis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/08—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings
- A63C9/085—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings with sole hold-downs, e.g. swingable
- A63C9/08557—Details of the release mechanism
- A63C9/08564—Details of the release mechanism using cam or slide surface
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/08—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings
- A63C9/085—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings with sole hold-downs, e.g. swingable
- A63C9/08557—Details of the release mechanism
- A63C9/08571—Details of the release mechanism using axis and lever
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/08—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings
- A63C9/086—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings using parts which are fixed on the shoe of the user and are releasable from the ski binding
Definitions
- the invention relates to a front automaton for a touring ski binding.
- This front automaton comprises two levers arranged laterally and opposite one another as seen in the longitudinal direction of the ski, each with a holding means for holding a ski boot in a toe area of the ski boot.
- the two levers are each mounted so as to be pivotable about an axis such that the holding means are moved in a transverse direction of the ski when the levers pivot about these axes.
- the front automaton has a release position in which the two holding means are at a first distance from one another. It also has a locking position in which the two holding means are at a second distance from one another, which is smaller than the first distance.
- ski bindings can be divided into piste bindings, which are only used for downhill skiing and skiing on ski lifts, and touring bindings, which are also used for walking on skis, in particular for climbing with the help of climbing skins attached to the skis. While the former only have to ensure reliable fixation of the ski boot on the ski in a so-called downhill position, the latter must also be able to be moved from the downhill position into an ascent position for climbing, in which the ski boot can be pivoted about an axis in the transverse direction of the ski and lifted off the ski at the heel in order to enable a joint movement between the ski boot and the ski for walking.
- Touring ski bindings can be divided into two types.
- One type includes a ski boot carrier that can be pivoted relative to the SI ⁇ i, to which the ski boot is held by binding jaws.
- a representative member of this type of touring ski binding is, for example, the EP 0 754 079 B1 (Fritschi AG ).
- the second type of touring ski binding does not include such a ski boot carrier.
- the ski boot is pivotally mounted in a toe area on the sole in a front automatic mechanism that is fixed to the ski.
- the heel automatic mechanism is also firmly attached to the SI ⁇ i at a distance from the front automatic mechanism that is adapted to the length of the SI ⁇ i boot sole and locks the boot in the heel area in the downhill position.
- Ski boots suitable for this type of binding typically have two lateral recesses in the toe area for pivoting mounting in the front automatic mechanism. In the heel area, recesses that are open to the rear are formed on the sole of the boot, into which the heel automatic mechanism can engage. In addition, such ski boots have a stiff or only slightly flexible sole. In the latter case, the ski boots can be designed to be flexible, for example in the ball area of the foot.
- a (fictitious) SI ⁇ i is often used as a reference system, assuming that the binding is mounted on this SI ⁇ i.
- This practice is adopted in the present text.
- the term "longitudinal direction of the ski” means along the alignment of the longitudinal axis of the ski.
- "ski parallel” for an elongated object means aligned along the longitudinal axis of the ski.
- the term “ski parallel” means aligned parallel to the gliding surface of the ski.
- cross direction of the ski means a direction transverse to the longitudinal direction of the ski, which does not have to be oriented exactly at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the ski.
- ski center in turn means a center of the ski seen in the cross direction of the ski, while the term “ski fixed” means not movable relative to the SI ⁇ i. It should also be noted that terms that do not contain the word “ski” also refer to the reference system of the (fictitious) ski.
- front, back, “top”, “bottom” and “side” refer to the “front”, “back”, “top”, “bottom” and “side” of the ski.
- horizontal and “vertical” refer to the ski, where “horizontal” means lying in a plane parallel to the ski and “vertical” means oriented perpendicular to this plane.
- a touring ski binding of the second type introduced above is in the EP 0 199 098 A2 (Bartel ) and is sold under the brand name Dynafit.
- the front part of this system comprises two angle levers, which are arranged opposite one another in the transverse direction of the ski and are each pivoted about an axis running in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the two angle levers each have an upwardly directed arm and a sideways directed arm, which are arranged at right angles to one another.
- the upwardly directed arms each comprise a truncated cone or hemispherical pin pointing towards the middle of the ski, which can engage in recesses provided for this purpose in the toe area of a ski boot.
- the sideways directed arms of the angle levers point towards the middle of the ski like the pins, but are operatively connected to one another via a spring device. Since the two angle levers are spring-loaded by the spring device via the sideways directed arms, they can be moved downwards and upwards by overcoming a dead center position in which the two sideways directed arms are aligned in a linear extension to one another. snap upwards. When the sideways arms are snapped downwards, the upwards arms are pivoted together. When the sideways arms are snapped upwards, on the other hand, the upwards arms are pivoted apart. Accordingly, the pins for holding a ski boot are closer together in the first case and further apart in the second case.
- a ski boot can be held or pivoted between the two angle levers using the pins.
- This position of the front part of the binding is therefore a holding position.
- the holding means are far enough apart for the ski boot to be released. Accordingly, this position of the front part of the binding is a release position.
- the EP 0 199 098 A2 (Bartel ) has an opening lever which can be pivoted about an axis aligned in the transverse direction of the ski and which surrounds the connection of the two laterally aligned arms of the angle levers at the top and bottom.
- This opening lever By operating this opening lever, the laterally aligned arms of the angle levers can be pushed upwards, where they snap into the free position.
- the laterally aligned arms of the angle levers can also be pushed downwards, where they snap into the fixed position.
- the ski boot can be released from the ski binding system without using the release lever. To do this, the ski boot is first released from the heel mechanism and then from the front part of the binding. In the event of a frontal fall, the ski boot is released upwards by the heel mechanism and tilted forwards in the front part of the binding. If the force acting forwards or upwards on the ski boot is sufficiently large, the ski boot is also torn from the front part of the binding by overcoming the force acting on the two angle levers. In the event of a sideways fall, the ski boot is released sideways by the heel mechanism and tilted forwards by a force located in the toe area of the ski boot. The ski boot is released from the front part of the binding by rotating, overcoming the force acting on the angle levers.
- Both the binding front part according to the EP 0 199 098 A2 (Bartel ) as well as the binding front part according to the WO 2009/121187 A1 (G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc.) have the disadvantage that release is uncontrolled. When released, the two angle levers are pushed apart in an undefined manner by a force (or torque) acting on the ski boot, which releases the ski boot from the front part of the binding.
- This front automaton also includes two angle levers, each of which includes two arms arranged essentially at right angles to one another.
- the first arms of these angle levers also include a truncated cone or hemispherical pin pointing towards the middle of the ski for holding a ski boot.
- the second arms of these angle levers are also aligned laterally towards the middle of the ski, pointing towards one another.
- the two angle levers are pivotally mounted about vertical axes, with the axes in front of the toe area of the ski boot.
- the second arms of the angle levers are not directly connected, but each end engages in a lateral notch of a pivot lever aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- This pivot lever can be moved in the longitudinal direction of the ski, with the ends of the second arms of the two angle levers being guided in the lateral notches. Accordingly, when the pivot lever is moved, the two angle levers are pivoted towards or away from each other, which allows the front automatic device to be transferred from the release position to the holding position and back.
- the pivot lever In addition to being able to move in the longitudinal direction of the ski, the pivot lever is mounted on the front automatic device so that it can pivot around a vertical axis, but is pressed into a parallel alignment by two springs. If a force acts laterally on the ski boot, the outer of the two angle levers can be pushed outwards by pivoting the pivot lever slightly to the side against the spring force until the angle lever is released from the lateral notch in the pivot lever. At the same time, the inner angle lever is pivoted slightly inwards by the pivoting movement of the pivot lever, following the outer angle lever.
- the front automatic device to WO 2007/010392 A2 (SI ⁇ i Trab SRL) a lateral release, where the ski boot support is first loosened and, as soon as the outer angle lever is released, it is released completely.
- the front automat also enables a frontal release, which, however, is just as uncontrolled as with the binding front parts according to the EP 0 199 098 A2 (Bartel ) and the WO 2009/121187 A1 (G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc.) .
- binding front parts and front automatics offer only limited safety for the skier.
- the two binding front parts offer EP 0 199 098 A2 (Bartel ) and the WO 2009/121187 A1 (G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc.)
- the front automatic device according to the WO 2007/010392 A2 offers a limited lateral safety release.
- the two angle levers are continuously spread and thus opened until the outer angle lever is completely released and pivoted away. The ski boot is already partially released while the angle levers are being spread.
- the front automatic also offers WO 2007/010392 A2 (SI ⁇ i Trab SRL) no frontal release. It only allows the ski boot to be ripped forwards or upwards out of the front automatic system if sufficient force is applied. This is why these well-known front automatic systems offer little safety for a skier.
- the object of the invention is to create a front automatic device belonging to the technical field mentioned at the beginning, which increases the safety for a skier.
- the holding means are pins which are arranged on the respective lever in such a way that they point with a free end towards the middle of the ski starting from the respective lever.
- the front automaton has a safety release position.
- the front automaton also comprises a forced control on which the two levers are mounted in the holding position, so that the two levers are coupled within a dynamic range and can be moved in the transverse direction of the ski, and the two holding means are coupled at a second distance from each other and moved on a dynamic path in the transverse direction of the ski, whereby a ski boot held in the front automaton can be moved together with the two holding means in the holding position on the dynamic path in the transverse direction of the ski, whereby the front automaton can absorb energy without the ski boot being released from the front automaton.
- the coupled movement of the two levers along the dynamic range can be, for example, a pivoting movement of the two levers around the axes.
- the coupled movement of the two levers along the dynamic range can also be a linear movement along a linear path, which corresponds to a translational movement of the two levers, in which the two levers are coupled and moved in the transverse direction of the ski.
- the coupled movement of the two levers along the dynamic range can also be a linear movement along a linear path, which corresponds to a combination a translational movement and a pivoting movement of the two levers, in which the two levers are coupled and moved in the transverse direction of the ski and pivoted about the axes.
- the dynamic range can be limited on one or both sides by a stop, which stops at least one of the two levers and prevents it from moving further.
- the dynamic range can be limited on one or both sides by the fact that from a certain position the two levers can no longer be moved coupled, but can be moved decoupledly.
- the dynamic range for one of the levers can be limited by a stop and for the other lever to be limited by the fact that from a certain position it can be moved decoupledly.
- the type of limitation for the two levers can also depend on the side of the dynamic range.
- the dynamic range on a first side is limited by a stop for a first of the two levers and for a second of the two levers it is limited by the fact that from a certain position it can be moved decoupledly.
- the dynamic range on a second side for the first lever can be limited by the fact that it can be moved in a decoupled manner from a certain position, while the dynamic range on the second side for the second lever is limited by a stop.
- a ski boot held in the front automatic device can be moved along the dynamic path in the transverse direction of the ski together with the two holding means in the holding position, whereby the front automatic device can absorb energy without the ski boot being released from the front automatic device.
- This is advantageous when skiing and possibly in the event of a fall, as impacts can occur on the ski boot or the ski boot, which should not cause the ski boot to be released from the front automatic device.
- the energy that the front automatic device can absorb can be specified by adjusting the length of the dynamic path and/or a resistance force that must be applied for the movement. Accordingly, a controlled A safety release should be provided which is triggered if the energy of a blow exceeds the absorbable energy.
- the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range and can be pivoted around the axes in the transverse direction of the ski. This has the advantage that the movement of the two levers is guided by the axes.
- the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range and can be moved along a linear path in the transverse direction of the ski.
- This can, for example, be a translational movement of the two levers, in which the two levers are coupled and moved in the transverse direction of the ski.
- the movement of the two levers along the linear path can, for example, also be a combination of a translational movement and a pivoting movement of the two levers, in which the two levers are coupled and moved in the transverse direction of the ski and pivoted about the axes.
- the dynamic path of the holding means can be designed in such a way that forces acting from different directions on a ski boot held in the front automatic device can be optimally absorbed by the front automatic device.
- the front automaton for a ski binding comprises two levers arranged laterally opposite one another as seen in the longitudinal direction of the ski, each with a holding means for holding a ski boot in a toe area of the ski boot.
- the two levers are preferably each mounted so as to be pivotable about an axis and the holding means are moved by the levers during a pivoting movement in a transverse direction of the ski, the front automaton preferably comprising an element referred to as a positive control and the two levers being mountable on this positive control and on another element of the front automaton.
- the front automaton preferably has a release position in which the two holding means are at a first distance from one another.
- the front automaton preferably has a holding position in which the two holding means are at a second distance from each other, which is smaller than the first distance.
- the two levers are movably mounted on the forced control, which is also movable in the holding position.
- the two levers are preferably coupled by the movable forced control within a dynamic range and can be pivoted in the transverse direction of the ski, with the two holding means coupled at the second distance from each other being moved along a dynamic path in the transverse direction of the ski.
- How the forced control is moved is not predetermined. It can be a linear movement or a pivoting or rotating movement, for example.
- the front automaton for a ski binding in particular a touring ski binding, comprises two levers arranged laterally opposite one another as seen in the longitudinal direction of the ski, each with a holding means for holding a ski boot in a toe area of the ski boot.
- the two levers are preferably each pivotably mounted about an axis and the holding means are moved by the levers during a pivoting movement in a transverse direction of the ski, the front automaton preferably comprising an element referred to as a positive control and the axes being mounted on this positive control.
- the front automaton preferably has a release position in which the two holding means are at a first distance from one another.
- the front automaton also preferably has a holding position in which the two holding means are at a second distance from one another, which is smaller than the first distance.
- the two levers are advantageously mounted on the positive control, which is movable in the holding position.
- the two levers are preferably coupled by the movable forced control within a dynamic range and can be moved in the transverse direction of the ski, with the two holding means coupled at a second distance from each other and moved along a dynamic path in the transverse direction of the ski.
- How the forced control is moved is not predetermined. It can be a linear movement or a swivel or rotary movement, for example.
- preferred embodiments of the front-loading machine can also be designed differently.
- the following shows how such other preferred embodiments can be designed using advantageous features.
- the two preferred embodiments mentioned above can also include one or more of these advantageous features.
- the axes of the levers are advantageously arranged in a plane parallel to the skis. This has the advantage that the axes can be arranged below the holding means, thereby achieving a compact design of the front automatic device.
- the axes are also preferably aligned essentially parallel to the skis, although deviations from a parallel alignment of 10 degrees or 20 degrees can be provided. Preferably, however, the lateral deviation of the axes from a parallel alignment is less than 10 degrees. If the levers can be pivoted within the dynamic range and the dynamic path of the holding means lies in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the respective lever, one plane of the dynamic paths of the holding means is aligned essentially in the transverse direction of the skis.
- the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range and can be moved in the transverse direction of the skis along a linear path
- the alignment of the axes can result in a continuation of the movement of the holding means in the transverse direction of the skis when the levers are pivoted about the axes.
- this arrangement of the axes is advantageous if the front automatic device provides a lateral safety release. With such a lateral safety release, the ski boot moves essentially in a plane parallel to the ski boot.
- the movement of the ski boot can include both a linear movement and a rotation about a vertical axis of the ski boot.
- the dynamic path of the holding means can best absorb movements of the ski boot caused by differently oriented forces running across the ski. Accordingly, the energy that the front automatic device can absorb can be specified as best as possible for different forces. By specifying the absorbable energy, a controlled, lateral safety release can be enabled, which occurs when the absorbable energy is exceeded.
- the axes can be aligned differently. For example, they can be aligned vertically or at any angle to the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- both levers comprise a control bar for interacting with a ski boot on a side facing the middle of the ski.
- These control bars can, for example, be an element attached to the corresponding lever and protruding towards the middle of the ski.
- the control bars have the advantage that when the two levers are pivoted above a certain pivot angle, the control bar of the lever in the direction of movement can interact with the ski boot and the holding means of this lever can therefore be released from the ski boot.
- This has the advantage that the process of a lateral safety release from the front automatic device can be simplified. This means that if the front automatic device provides a lateral safety release, the movement sequence of the ski boot becomes more continuous when the safety is released from the side and this increases safety for the skier.
- the control bars can interact with the ski boot when the levers are pivoted within the dynamic range. If, however, the two levers are movable along a linear path within the dynamic range and, for example, at least one of the two levers can pivot about the corresponding axis in the event of a lateral safety release, the corresponding control arm can interact with the ski boot in the event of the safety release, whereby the ski boot can be released more easily from the front automatic device.
- control arms not to be designed as a separate element.
- they can be manufactured in one piece together with the corresponding lever, or the levers can also be shaped in such a way that, for example, an arch in the lever takes on the function of a control arm.
- the levers comprise a control arm-like arch, which is also included under the term control arm.
- the two levers may not comprise a control bar arranged on the side of the levers facing the middle of the ski. If, for example, the holding means are designed in such a way that they easily detach from the ski boot when the levers are pivoted beyond a certain angle, this alternative may be advantageous since it simplifies the design of the front automatic device and makes its manufacture more cost-effective.
- the forced control is movable in the holding position along a forced control path, whereby the two levers are coupled and movable within the dynamic range.
- the two levers in the holding position are preferably fixedly mounted on the forced control, whereby the two levers are coupled and movable within the dynamic range.
- the forced control in the holding position is preferably movable with a coupled pivoting movement of the two levers within the dynamic range of the two levers along a forced control path. How exactly the forced control is moved in these two cases is not specified.
- its movement can be a movement in a linear direction, a pivoting or rotating movement, or a combination thereof.
- the forced control path can therefore be an angle of rotation.
- the forced control path can be a combination of angle of rotation and linear path.
- the forced control it is also possible, for example, for the forced control to be moved as a whole in a combined movement. It is also possible, for example, for one or more elements of the forced control to be moved in a linear direction, while one or more other elements of the forced control are rotated or swiveled. All such movements of the forced control along the forced control path have the advantage that a coupled Pivoting movement of the two levers along the dynamic range can be achieved.
- the movement of the forced control is a movement in a linear direction, a swivel movement or a combination of these, the movement and thus also the forced control path are preferably aligned in the cross-ski direction. This has the advantage that the forced control can follow the coupled swivel movement of the two levers, which simplifies the design of the front automatic device.
- the forced control it is also possible for the forced control to not be movable in the holding position, but to be fixed to the ski.
- the positive control is movable in the holding position, then if it deviates from a center of the positive control path, it can preferably be pressed with a force towards the center of the positive control path by a pre-tensioned, elastic element. It is also possible for more than one pre-tensioned, elastic element to be present. Regardless of the number of elastic elements, this has the advantage that the positive control is moved by the elastic element(s) to the center of the positive control path when no other force acts on the positive control. The two levers can also be moved to a center of the dynamic range using the positive control.
- the two levers can be moved from this center of the dynamic range in both a first and a second direction along the dynamic range under the influence of a lateral force, and are moved back to the center of the dynamic range when the lateral force is removed. If a sideways impact or sideways force occurs on the ski boot or ski during ski skating, the corresponding energy can be absorbed by the front automatic system without the ski boot coming loose, regardless of which side the impact or force comes from.
- the mentioned center of the forced control path and the mentioned center of the dynamic range can be the geometric center of the forced control path or the dynamic area. However, it can also be a point in the forced control path or dynamic area that is not in the geometric center. It is possible for these centers to be in a continuous area of the forced control path or dynamic area. In this case, the centers are given by the fact that the forced control or the levers are pressed to this point in the forced control path or dynamic area by the elastic element(s). However, it is also possible for the centers to be in a bend in the forced control path or dynamic area.
- the forced control path can be v-shaped and the center of the forced control path can be in the tip of the "v".
- the forced control can be moved from the center of the forced control path along one or the other arm of the "v" depending on the direction of the lateral force or lateral impact.
- the center of the forced control path can also be at one end of the forced control path. This can be the case in particular if the forced control path runs along the longitudinal direction of the ski. Then the forced control can be moved in the longitudinal direction of the ski starting from this end of the forced control path, but in this example the two levers are mounted on the forced control in the holding position in such a way that they can be pivoted in the direction of action of the lateral force or lateral impact, while the forced control is moved in the longitudinal direction of the ski independently of the direction of action of the lateral force.
- levers rather than the forced control
- both levers can be pushed into the middle of the dynamic range by one or more pre-tensioned, elastic elements.
- both levers can be pushed separately into the middle of the dynamic range by one or more pre-tensioned, elastic elements.
- a corresponding embodiment can be particularly advantageous if the forced control itself is arranged fixed to the ski.
- the pre-tensioned elastic element is preferably located in the middle of the ski in the longitudinal direction of the ski aligned.
- the pre-stressed, elastic element presses on the positive control in the longitudinal direction of the ski by pressing a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston into a horizontally arranged, essentially V-shaped indentation in the positive control.
- the positive control which can be moved in the transverse direction of the ski, can be held in the middle of the positive control path by pressing the piston into a tip of the V-shaped indentation.
- the positive control can be moved starting from the middle of the positive control path along the positive control path, the piston being pressed by the corresponding flank of the essentially V-shaped indentation in the longitudinal direction of the ski against the pre-stressed force of the elastic element.
- the force of the elastic element acting via the piston on the flanks of the essentially V-shaped indentations and directed in the longitudinal direction of the ski causes a restoring force which drives the positive control back to the middle of the positive control path.
- the piston can, for example, have a roller bearing at its tip which can roll on the flanks of the essentially V-shaped indentation in the positive control.
- the piston does not have a roller bearing, but that the piston and/or the essentially V-shaped indentation in the positive control have a special coating which reduces the frictional resistance. It is also possible that the piston has a roller bearing at its tip which can roll on a special coating of the essentially V-shaped indentation in the positive control. However, it is also possible that the piston does not have such a roller bearing and that neither the piston nor the essentially V-shaped indentation in the positive control have a special coating.
- a pre-stressed, elastic element is present and is aligned in the middle of the ski in the longitudinal direction of the ski
- the pre-stressed, elastic element presses in the longitudinal direction of the ski on the forced control by pressing a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable pivoting element, so that a first foot of the pivoting element is in a substantially V-shaped Indentation in the positive control.
- the pivoting element can, for example, comprise a second and third foot, which are each arranged on one side of the middle of the ski on the pivoting element and are aligned towards the piston.
- the positive control which can be moved in the transverse direction of the ski, can thus be held in the middle of the positive control path by supporting the second and third feet of the pivoting element on a front side of the piston and by pressing the first foot of the pivoting element into a tip of the essentially V-shaped indentation. Accordingly, the positive control can be moved starting from the middle of the positive control path along the positive control path. The first foot of the pivoting element, which is pressed into the essentially V-shaped indentation, is also moved. If the pivoting element is pivotably mounted between its three feet about a pivot axis, the pivoting element is pivoted so that, depending on the pivoting direction, only the second or third foot of the pivoting element is supported on the piston.
- the piston Since the corresponding foot is moved towards the middle of the ski, the piston is moved against the pre-tension of the pre-tensioned, elastic element. At the same time, the force with which the piston is pressed against the pivot element pushes the pivot element back into its central position, in which the second and third feet of the pivot element are supported on the front of the piston. Accordingly, the forced control is driven back to the middle of the forced control path.
- the pivot element or the pivot axis of the pivot element is mounted so that it can be moved slightly in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- a pre-stressed, elastic element presses in the longitudinal direction of the ski on the forced control by pressing a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against a pivotable element of the forced control.
- the piston can be pressed into a tip of a horizontally arranged, essentially V-shaped recess in the pivot element, whereby the pivotable element is aligned essentially in the longitudinal direction of the ski and the movable in the transverse direction of the ski Forced control is held in the middle of the forced control path.
- the forced control can be moved starting from the middle of the forced control path along the forced control path by pivoting the pivotable element in the appropriate direction.
- the V-shaped indentation is also pivoted together with the pivotable element, whereby one of the two flanks of the V-shaped indentation is pressed against the piston, which is thereby moved against the force of the elastic element directed in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the force of the elastic element acting via the piston on the flanks of the essentially V-shaped indentation and directed in the longitudinal direction of the ski causes a restoring force which drives the forced control back to the middle of the forced control path.
- the piston With a pivoting element of the forced control, it is also possible for the piston to have a separate pivoting element at its front end, for example, which is pressed against the pivoting element of the forced control.
- the pivoting element of the forced control can also be aligned essentially in the longitudinal direction of the ski and the forced control, which can be moved in the transverse direction of the ski, can be held in the middle of the forced control path.
- the forced control can also be moved starting from the middle of the forced control path along the forced control path by pivoting the pivoting element in the appropriate direction.
- the separate pivoting element at the front end of the piston is pivoted along and the piston is moved against the force of the elastic element. This causes a restoring force which drives the forced control back to the middle of the forced control path.
- a pre-tensioned, elastic element presses in the longitudinal direction of the ski on the forced control by pressing a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against at least one pivotally mounted lever, which in turn is pressed against a pivotable element of the forced control.
- the two pivotally mounted levers with their pivot axes can, for example, be arranged in such a way that a force from the piston is transmitted in a geared manner to the pivotable element of the forced control.
- the two pivotally mounted levers with their pivot axes are arranged in such a way that a force from the piston is transmitted in a geared manner to the pivotable element of the forced control.
- the forced control can be moved starting from the middle of the forced control path along the forced control path by pivoting the pivotable element in the appropriate direction. If there is only one pivoting lever, this lever can be pivoted and the piston can be pushed against the restoring force by the lever.
- the pivoting movement of the pivoting element of the positive control can pivot one or the other pivoting lever depending on the pivoting direction of the pivoting element, as the pivoting element presses against this lever due to its pivoting movement. This can push the corresponding pivoting lever against the piston, which in turn moves it against the restoring force.
- the pre-tensioned, elastic element in the middle of the ski is aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski, then in addition to these four preferred variants, there is also the possibility that the pre-tensioned, elastic element interacts with the forced control in a different way.
- the pre-tensioned elastic element is not aligned in the middle of the ski in the longitudinal direction.
- it can be aligned along the forced control path or along the dynamic area.
- it is aligned differently and due to its Preload exerts a force on a deflection mechanism which redirects the effect of the force in a direction along the control path or along the dynamic range.
- the front automaton has a safety release position.
- the two levers in the holding position can advantageously be moved to one end of the dynamic range, where the one of the two levers which comprises the holding means which is moved away from the centre of the ski on the dynamic path can be released by the forced control and pivoted away from the other of the two levers, whereby the front automaton can be brought from the holding position into the safety release position.
- This has the advantage that a lateral safety release is possible. Since the one of the two levers which is in the direction of movement can be pivoted away, the corresponding holding means is also pivoted away, whereby a ski boot held in the holding position is released in its direction of movement as soon as the two levers in the holding position are moved to the corresponding end of the dynamic range.
- the two levers are each mounted on the positive control by a first sliding block guide and a first sliding block mounted therein. Furthermore, in the safety release position, at least one of the two levers is preferably released by releasing the corresponding first sliding block from the corresponding first positive control.
- the first sliding block guides it is possible for the first sliding block guides to enclose and guide the respective first sliding block on both sides, at least in the holding position.
- the first sliding block guides not to enclose and guide the respective first sliding block on both sides, but only on one side or only over an area on both sides and otherwise guide on one side. Guide on one side means that, for example, the respective first sliding block only touches the corresponding first sliding block guide on one side.
- the first sliding block guides can, for example, be a surface on which the respective first sliding block is supported and along which the respective first sliding block can be moved.
- the first sliding blocks can be pressed against the respective first sliding block guide by means of an elastic element, for example.
- the formulation is used here that a first sliding block is guided in the corresponding first sliding block guide.
- the first sliding blocks can be designed in a variety of ways. For example, they can be cylindrical. However, they can also be cylindrical and each have a roller enclosing them, which improves their storage in the corresponding first sliding block guide.
- the two first sliding blocks can be block-shaped, for example. It is also possible for the two first sliding blocks to have differently shaped areas. For example, they can each have a cylindrical area and one or more other areas. Depending on the area of the first sliding block guide, the cylindrical area or another area of the respective first sliding block can interact with the first sliding block guide. All of these types of first sliding block guides with first sliding blocks mounted in them have the advantage that in the holding position the two levers are mounted on the positive control and in the safety release position at least one of the two levers is released and therefore has the best possible freedom of movement.
- both levers in the holding position and in the safety release position are each mounted on the forced control by a first guide and a first sliding block mounted in it.
- both the first sliding guides and the first sliding blocks can be designed in a variety of ways, as already described.
- the two levers can also be mounted on the forced control by a first guide rail and a first sliding block mounted therein.
- the axes of the levers can be mounted on the forced control, while the levers are mounted on another element of the front machine by a first guide rail and a first sliding block mounted therein.
- the levers can be mounted on the other element in both the holding position and the safety release position, or only in the holding position.
- the levers can also be mounted on the forced control or on the other element in a way other than by means of first guide rails and first sliding blocks.
- a mounting can be formed, for example, by a movable lever or piston connection.
- first guide rails and first guide blocks are present and if the first guide blocks are mounted in the holding position in the corresponding first guide rail, the first guide rails preferably have a geometry such that in the safety release position that of the two levers which comprises the holding means which is moved away from the center of the ski on the dynamic path can be pivoted. In the safety release position, the corresponding lever can be pivoted with a movement of the corresponding first guide block in the corresponding first guide rail or can be released from the corresponding first guide rail.
- the corresponding first guide block in the safety release position is corresponding first link guide is released, this has the advantage that in the holding position the two levers are mounted on the positive control or on the further element of the positive control and that in the safety release position the one of the two levers which comprises the holding means which is moved away from the centre of the ski on the dynamic path can pivot unhindered.
- first sliding block guides are present and have a geometry such that the first sliding blocks are mounted in the corresponding first sliding block guide in the holding position and in the safety release position
- the first sliding block guides are preferably widened in an area in which the corresponding first sliding block can be moved in the corresponding first sliding block guide in the safety release position when the corresponding lever is pivoted. This has the advantage that the one of the two levers which can be pivoted in the safety release position can be moved more easily, since the corresponding first sliding block is loosely guided in this area of the corresponding first sliding block guide and therefore there is no or very little frictional resistance between the corresponding first sliding block and the corresponding first sliding block guide.
- the first sliding block guides also preferably have a corner in their shape around which the corresponding first sliding block is moved when the corresponding lever is released during a transition from the holding position to the safety release position. This has the advantage that the lever is released immediately during a safety release and thus the transition from the holding position to the safety release position takes place quickly.
- the first sliding guides have a geometry such that in the safety release position, that of the two levers which comprises the holding means which is moved on the dynamic path towards the middle of the ski is fixed.
- This can be achieved, for example, by the corresponding first sliding block abutting one end of the corresponding first sliding guide.
- this can also This can be achieved by guiding the corresponding lever by the first link guide in such a way that it hits another stop and is thus prevented from moving further.
- the forced control can be moved along a forced control path in the holding position, this can also be achieved, for example, by blocking further movement of the forced control in the safety release position, which also prevents further movement of the corresponding lever.
- the further movement of the forced control can be achieved, for example, by a stop.
- the first guide rails prefferably have a geometry such that in the safety release position, the one of the two levers that includes the holding means that is moved on the dynamic path towards the center of the ski can be pivoted within a limited range, while the other lever can be pivoted freely. This also makes it possible to achieve a controlled release of the ski boot in the event of a lateral safety release.
- the two levers in the safety release position can also be pivoted in a coupled manner by the geometry of the first guide rails, whereby the one of the two levers which comprises the holding means which is moved away from the centre of the ski on the dynamic path can be pivoted proportionally more than the other lever.
- the forced control is arranged in a ski-fixed manner in the safety release position. If the forced control is movable in the holding position along the forced control path, the forced control can be prevented from moving further beyond one end of the forced control path, for example by a stop. However, it is also possible that one of the two levers is prevented from moving further by a stop in the safety release position and that the forced control is held in place by its bearing on the forced control. prevents further movement. If the two levers are mounted on the forced control or on the other element of the front machine by a first guide and a first sliding block, the geometry of the first sliding control can also ensure that the forced control is fixed to the ski in the safety release position.
- the forced control can also be movable in the safety release position.
- the forced control is movable in the holding position and the front automaton comprises a pre-tensioned, elastic element aligned in the middle of the ski in the longitudinal direction of the ski and the forced control has a substantially V-shaped indentation
- troughs are advantageously arranged in the outer areas of the two flanks of the V-shaped indentation.
- elastic element can interact with one of these troughs when the forced control is in the safety release position.
- a first foot of a pivoting element can interact with one of these troughs when the forced control is in the safety release position.
- the troughs have the advantage that the restoring force which acts on the forced control through the piston or the pivoting element and drives it to a middle of the forced control path is minimized or completely eliminated in the safety release position. It does not matter whether the forced control is fixed to the ski in the safety release position or whether it is movable. However, by minimizing or eliminating the repulsive force, the troughs can support a fixed arrangement of the forced control in the safety release position.
- the positive control comprises a pivotable element in which the essentially V-shaped indentation is arranged, this can be achieved, for example, by a corresponding interaction of the pivotable element with the rest of the positive control.
- the two levers are mounted on the positive control in the release position so that the holding means of the two levers are at the first distance from each other. This has the advantage that the two levers and thus the distance between the two holding means in the release position can be controlled by the positive control.
- the two levers can be released from the forced control in the release position.
- both levers should be able to be mounted on the forced control when the front machine is moved from the release position to the holding position, whereby the distance between the two holding devices should also be reduced from the first distance to the second distance during this transfer.
- This can be achieved, for example, by mounting the two levers in the release position on a variable spacer.
- the distance between the two holding devices can be reduced to the second distance using this variable spacer and the two levers can be mounted on the forced control.
- the levers can be released from the variable spacer or remain mounted on the variable spacer.
- the two levers When the front machine is returned from the holding position is brought into the release position, the two levers should be able to be released from the positive control and the distance between the two holding devices should be able to be extended to the first distance by the variable spacer. If the two levers are not mounted on the variable spacer in the holding position, they should first be able to be mounted on the variable spacer.
- This alternative has the advantage that the distance between the two holding devices is not changed by the positive control, which means that the positive control can be constructed more sturdily and can withstand correspondingly greater forces.
- the forced control advantageously comprises a control element on which the two levers are mounted, wherein the control element is movable such that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means are at the first distance from each other and that the two levers are moved together in the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from each other.
- the control element is movable such that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means are at the first distance from each other and that the two levers are moved together in the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from each other.
- the forced control comprises a control element, whereby the two levers are moved together by the control element when transferred to the holding position and the holding means are at a second distance from each other.
- the two levers can be moved relative to each other by another element of the front system in such a way that the two levers are moved apart and the holding means are at a first distance from each other.
- this has the advantage that the transfer of the front machine from the release position to the holding position can be achieved by the forced control, while the transfer of the front machine from the The locking position is moved into the release position by an element independent of the forced control.
- the forced control includes a control element and if the two levers are each mounted on the forced control by a first sliding guide and a first sliding block mounted therein, the two levers are advantageously each mounted on the control element by the first sliding guide and the first sliding block mounted therein. This has the advantage that the forced control can be constructed simply and accordingly compactly. As a variant, however, there are also preferred options in which the two levers are not each mounted on the control element by the first sliding guide and the first sliding block mounted therein.
- the forced control comprises two elements instead of the control element, one of the two levers being mounted on a first element and the other of the two levers being mounted on a second element, and the first and second elements being movable relative to one another in such a way that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means are at the first distance from one another, and that the two levers are moved together in the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from one another.
- This can be implemented, for example, by the two elements of the forced control being connected to one another by a piston connection or a screw connection.
- the two elements can also be connected to one another by a pivot connection, for example, the holding means being moved apart or together by a pivoting movement of the two elements.
- the forced control comprises the control element mentioned above instead of the two elements.
- the forced control comprises, in addition to the two elements, the control element as a third element, whereby the third element enables the first and the second element to be moved relative to one another in such a way that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means in the first distance from each other and that the two levers are moved together in the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from each other.
- the forced control comprises the control element as a third element in addition to the two elements, wherein the third element enables the first and second elements to be moved relative to one another in such a way that the two levers are moved together when transferred to the holding position and the holding means are at a second distance from one another.
- the first and second elements can be moved relative to one another by another element of the front system in such a way that the two levers are moved apart and the holding means are at a first distance from one another.
- the forced control may comprise a third element which fulfils a different function than the control element, or for the forced control not to comprise a third element.
- the forced control comprises a control element without the two elements mentioned above or, in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as a third element and if the forced control can be pressed with a force towards the centre of the forced control path by a pre-tensioned elastic element in the event of a deviation from a centre of the forced control path, then, regardless of the previously mentioned, preferred variants, the control element is preferably designed in such a way that the restoring force which drives the forced control into the centre of the forced control path can be transferred to the forced control via this control element.
- the positive control can be pressed towards the centre of the positive control path by a prestressed elastic element with a force in the event of a deviation from a centre of the positive control path, the restoring force which drives the positive control to the centre of the positive control path can be transmitted to the positive control in a different way.
- the forced control comprises a control element without the two elements mentioned above or, in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as a third element
- this control element is designed to be pivotable in a preferred variant. This has the advantage that if the forced control moves away from the middle of the forced control path, a pivoting movement of the control element can be caused, whereby a lateral safety release can be triggered by the control element at a certain pivoting angle of the control element.
- the control element of the forced control can, for example, be pivotably mounted on another element of the forced control as well as pivotably mounted on the rest of the front machine.
- the two bearings can, for example, allow both a pivoting movement and a translational movement of the control element relative to the other element of the forced control or the rest of the front machine.
- the control element can also be designed, for example, such that from a certain angle in its pivoting movement it moves or releases the first, the second or both the first and the second element in such a way that one or both levers are released and can thus be pivoted apart.
- the forced control only comprises the control element and not the two elements mentioned above, the control element can also be designed such that from a certain angle in its pivoting movement it releases one or both levers, whereby the two levers can be pivoted apart in the event of a lateral safety release.
- control element is not designed to be pivotable.
- control element can be designed to be rotatable or movable along a linear path, for example.
- This linear path can be in the longitudinal direction of the ski, in the transverse direction of the ski, at an angle to these two directions, or curved.
- the forced control comprises two or more elements
- the forced control it is also possible for the forced control to comprise only the control element or only one differently designed element.
- the forced control comprises at least three elements, i.e. in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as a third element
- the first element and the second element of the forced control are preferably each mounted on the third element of the forced control by a second sliding block control and a second sliding block. Accordingly, the first and the second element can be moved relative to one another by moving the third element relative to the first or second element.
- the second sliding block guides it is possible for the second sliding block guides to enclose and guide the respective second sliding block on both sides.
- the second sliding block guides not to enclose and guide the respective second sliding block on both sides, but only to guide it on one side or only over an area on both sides and otherwise on one side. Guiding on one side means that, for example, the respective second sliding block only touches the corresponding second sliding block guide on one side.
- the second sliding block guides can, for example, be a surface on which the respective second sliding block is supported and along which the respective second sliding block can be moved. In this case, the second sliding blocks can be pressed against the respective second sliding block guide by means of an elastic element, for example. Accordingly, regardless of whether the second sliding block guides enclose the second sliding blocks on both sides or only on one side, the formulation is used here that a second sliding block is guided in the corresponding second sliding block guide.
- the second sliding blocks can be designed in a variety of ways. For example, they can be cylindrical. But they can also, for example, be cylindrical and each have a roller surrounding them, which improves their support in the corresponding second sliding guide. However, it is also possible for the two second sliding blocks to be block-shaped, for example. It is also possible for the two second sliding blocks to have differently shaped areas. For example, they can each have a cylindrical area and one or more other areas. Depending on the area of the second sliding guide, the cylindrical area or another area of the respective second sliding block can interact with the second sliding guide.
- the first element of the forced control to comprise, for example, a rack which is guided in the second element and for the third element of the forced control to be a pinion by means of which the first and second elements of the forced control can be moved relative to one another.
- the forced control comprises at least three elements.
- the control element or third element of the forced control is preferably movable along the longitudinal axis of the ski, whereby when the third element of the forced control moves in a first direction, the first and second elements of the forced control are moved together by the second guide rails, and when the third element of the forced control moves in a second direction, the first and second elements of the forced control are moved apart by the second guide rails.
- the first and second directions in the longitudinal direction of the ski can be the forward or backward direction, or vice versa.
- control element or third element of the forced control can also not be movable along the longitudinal axis of the ski, but can be designed to rotate about an axis of rotation.
- the second guide rail is present, for example, when the third element of the forced control is rotated in a first direction, the first and second elements of the forced control can be moved together by the second guide rails, and when the third element of the forced control is rotated in a second direction, the first and second elements of the forced control can be moved apart by the second guide rails.
- the second guide rails can be arranged in a spiral around the axis of rotation in the third element of the forced control or in the first or second element of the forced control.
- the first and second elements on the third element can also be mounted without using the second guides.
- the first element and the second element of the forced control can each be mounted on the third element of the forced control by a swivel joint, whereby when the third element of the forced control rotates in a first direction of rotation, the first and second elements of the forced control are moved together, and when the third element of the forced control moves in a second direction of rotation, the first and second elements of the forced control are moved apart.
- the forced control is movable along the forced control path in the holding position, it preferably comprises a carriage which is designed to be movable along the forced control path.
- the forced control it is possible for the forced control to comprise such a carriage in addition to the control element or the two elements already mentioned.
- the forced control it is also possible for the forced control to comprise such a carriage which simultaneously fulfils the function of the already mentioned first, second or third element or control element and thus corresponds to the corresponding first, second or third element or control element.
- more than one of the first, second and third elements or control elements is designed as a slide.
- the forced control comprises such a slide and none of the above-mentioned elements. It is again possible that the forced control consists only of such a slide or also comprises other elements.
- the other elements of the forced control are preferably mounted on the carriage.
- the other elements can, for example, be movable together with the carriage in the transverse direction of the ski.
- one or more of the other elements can be mounted on both the carriage and the rest of the front machine.
- the forced control includes, for example, a pivoting element
- this pivoting element can be mounted on both the carriage and the rest of the front machine and can pivot when the carriage moves in the transverse direction of the ski.
- the control element can be designed as a pivoting element and accordingly mounted on both the carriage and the rest of the front machine and can pivot when the carriage moves in the transverse direction of the ski.
- the forced control does not include such a carriage.
- the two axes are advantageously mounted on the carriage.
- the levers can also be mounted on another element of the forced control.
- the axes can be mounted not on the carriage, but on another element of the forced control or the front automatic device.
- the front automatic mechanism has a blocking position in which the two holding means are at a third distance from one another which is the same size or smaller than the second distance and in which the two levers are blocked in their movement.
- the front automatic device has a dampening position instead of a blocking position, in which the two holding means are at a third distance from each other, which is the same size as or smaller than the second distance and in which the two levers can be moved within the dynamic range with greater resistance than in the locking position.
- a touring binding system with the front automatic device is in the ascent position, a movement of a ski boot held in the front automatic device in the transverse direction of the ski relative to the automatic device can be dampened and reduced accordingly by the dampening position.
- This has the advantage that the skier's sure-footedness is increased when ascending, while at the same time the skier's safety is maintained by ensuring the possibility of a lateral safety release.
- the front automat is used by an experienced skier who only wants and/or needs a lateral safety release when there are large lateral forces.
- the ski boot can be held sufficiently in place by the front automat in the holding position, so that no blocking or damping position is required.
- the front automat can be designed to be simpler and lighter by dispensing with the blocking position and the damping position.
- the positive control can preferably be blocked in the blocking position. This means that the positive control can be blocked in its movement if it is movable in the holding position. If, on the other hand, the positive control is fixed to the ski in the holding position, this means that the bearings of the two levers on the positive control can be blocked in the blocking position. Accordingly, blocking the positive control has the advantage that movement of the two levers can be prevented by blocking a single element. Accordingly, the front automaton can be designed more simply and manufactured more cost-effectively.
- the forced control it is possible, for example, for the forced control to be blocked by a blocking element.
- a blocking element can be mounted on the forced control and can be pushed or swivelled into corresponding openings in the front machine to block it.
- one or more blocking elements can be mounted on the front machine and can be pushed or swivelled into corresponding openings in the forced control to block it.
- one or both levers can be blocked in the blocking position.
- the forced control can also be blocked at the same time.
- the front machine comprises a control lever which can be brought into a release position and into a holding position, whereby the front machine can be brought into the release position by positioning the control lever in the release position and by Positioning the control lever in the holding position can be brought into the holding position.
- the control lever can be either a pivoting or a sliding lever. Both have the advantage that the front machine can be moved in a simple, controlled manner from the release position to the holding position and back.
- the front automatic device comprises two control levers, whereby the front automatic device can be moved from the release position to the holding position by a first of these two control levers and from the holding position to the release position by a second of these two control levers.
- the front automatic device comprises a control lever by which it can only be moved from the held position to the released position.
- the front automatic device can, for example, comprise a spur by which it can be moved from the released position to the held position, whereby this spur can be actuated by a ski boot if the ski boot is correctly positioned in relation to the holding means for entry into the front automatic device.
- this spur can also be provided in addition to the one or two control levers which enable the front automatic device to be moved from the held position to the released position and back.
- the control lever can preferably be brought into a blocking position, wherein the front machine can be brought into the blocking position by positioning the control lever in the blocking position.
- the front machine comprises at least one control lever and has a damping position
- the control lever can preferably be brought into a damping position, wherein the front machine can be brought into the damping position by positioning the control lever in the damping position. Both have the advantage that the front machine is easy to operate.
- the front automatic device may comprise, for example, a separate control lever by means of which the front automatic device can be brought into the blocking position or damping position, or for the front automatic device not to comprise a control lever by means of which the front automatic device can be brought into the blocking position or damping position.
- the control lever preferably comprises at least one blocking element by means of which the positive control can be blocked in the blocking position by positioning the control lever in the blocking position. If the positive control is movable in the holding position, this can be done, for example, by the blocking element(s) each engaging in a recess in the positive control when the control lever is brought into the blocking position. However, it is also possible for the control lever to have two or more blocking elements which laterally surround an area of the positive control or the entire positive control and thereby prevent the positive control from moving.
- control lever can comprise, for example, two or more blocking elements which, when the control lever is in the blocking position, engage in the bearings of the two levers on the positive control and thereby block the positive control and the movement of the levers.
- the control lever preferably comprises at least one damper element, by means of which a movement of the two levers in the damper position can be subjected to a movement resistance by positioning the control lever in the damper position.
- the forced control is movable in the holding position, this can be done, for example, by the damper element(s) interacting with the forced control and thereby increasing the resistance to a movement of the forced control.
- the control lever can also comprise, for example, one or more damper elements, which interact with the levers or the axes and thus increase the resistance to movement of the two levers.
- the forced control is movable along the forced control path and comprises a carriage which is movable along the forced control path
- the front automatic device comprises at least one control lever with at least one damper element and has a damper position
- a movement of the two levers is assigned a resistance to movement by the damper element interacting with the carriage.
- the forced control comprises a control element
- a movement of the two levers can also be assigned a resistance to movement by the damper element interacting with the control element.
- the resistance to movement of the two levers can also be increased in a different way.
- the forced control is movable along the forced control path and comprises a carriage which is movable along the forced control path
- the front automatic device comprises at least one control lever with at least one blocking element and has a blocking position
- the forced control is blocked by the blocking element engaging in a recess in the carriage.
- the forced control can also be blocked in a different way.
- the forced control can, for example, not only be blocked by at least one blocking element of the control lever, but also in another way, or can be blocked in another way instead of by at least one blocking element of the control lever.
- the forced control comprises a control element, it can, for example, be blocked by blocking the control element.
- the control element of the forced control can, for example, be movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski into a lateral guide, whereby the control element can also not be designed to be completely movable in the lateral guide in order to sufficiently prevent it from moving in a direction other than along the longitudinal direction of the ski and to block.
- the control element of the forced control can be designed to be movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski from the lateral guide, which means that it can be released for movement in a direction other than along the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the lateral guide used for blocking in this example does not have to be a guide that completely surrounds the control element on the side. It can also be a rail-like guide onto which the control element can be pushed.
- the movement of the control element blocked by the lateral guide should be the movement that can be carried out by the forced control in the holding position. It can therefore be a linear movement in the transverse direction of the ski as well as a rotary or swivel movement.
- the control element can, for example, be moved by the control lever in the longitudinal direction of the ski in order to actuate the blocking of the control element.
- the front automatic device comprising a guide element in which the control element of the forced control is mounted.
- the control element can be pressed against the control lever together with the guide element by a piston pre-tensioned with an elastic element and can therefore be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the ski in accordance with the positioning of the control lever.
- the forced control can also be designed to be pressed towards the middle of the forced control path by the elastic element in the event of a deviation from the middle of the forced control path.
- This also has the advantage that the guide element is pressed against the control lever but does not necessarily have to follow the control lever. Compared to direct mounting of the guide element on the control lever, this has the advantage that, for example, the control lever can be brought from the blocking position to the holding position, as a result of which the guide element is moved against the pre-tensioned piston. However, if the control lever is moved from the holding position to the blocking position, the control lever can also be moved to the blocking position without moving the guide element. If, for example, the guide element is prevented by an obstacle from being moved by the pre-tensioned piston, the guide element can also can only be moved by the pre-tensioned piston when the obstacle has been removed.
- control lever can also be moved from the holding position to the blocking position, as a result of which the guide element is moved against the pre-tensioned piston. If, however, in this variant the control lever is moved from the blocking position to the holding position, the control lever can also be brought into the holding position without moving the guide element. Depending on the design of the front automatic device, this can be advantageous. As a further variant, the control lever can also be mounted directly on the guide element, or the front automatic device can not include a guide element at all. In this last case, for example, the positive control can be pressed against the control lever by the pre-tensioned piston and/or the positive control can also be mounted directly on the control lever.
- control element of the forced control it is also possible for not only the control element of the forced control, but also another element of the forced control or the entire forced control to be movable in and out of the lateral guide in the longitudinal direction of the ski as described for the control element.
- the forced control comprises more or fewer than three elements.
- the holding means are pins which are arranged on the respective lever in such a way that they point with a free end towards the middle of the ski, starting from the respective lever.
- the pins have pointed free ends. This has the advantage that the ski boot, which should be held in the front machine, can be stored in the front machine so that it can pivot precisely around the axis that is aligned horizontally in the transverse direction of the ski.
- the pins have rounded free ends. This has the advantage that the ski boot can easily be released from the front automatic device in the event of a lateral safety release.
- the pins have tapered areas towards their free ends, with the free ends of the pins being rounded. This has the advantage that by selecting the appropriate size of the tapered areas and the size of the rounded ends of the pins, an optimization can be achieved between precisely pivoting support of the ski boot around the horizontal axis aligned in the transverse direction of the ski and good detachability of the ski boot from the front automatic device in the event of a lateral safety release.
- the holding devices are designed differently.
- the front automatic device comprises a housing which can be fastened to a ski and a hold-down element which can be fastened to the ski.
- the housing can preferably be fastened to a ski in its front region, while in its rear region it is mounted so as to be movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski by the hold-down element, wherein the housing can be held on the ski in its rear region by the hold-down element fastened to the ski.
- the housing can be fastened to a ski in its rear region, while in its front region it is mounted so as to be movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski by the hold-down element fastened to the ski, wherein the housing can be held on the ski in its front region by the hold-down element fastened to the ski.
- Both of these things mean that when the front automat is mounted on a SI ⁇ i, the housing is attached to the SI ⁇ i in its front or rear area, while the rear or front area of the housing is held in the longitudinal guide of the hold-down element attached to the SI ⁇ i and can move in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the hold-down element.
- This allows the SI ⁇ i to bend when skiing, with the front automat adapting to the bend of the ski by moving the housing in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the hold-down element.
- This has the advantage that the front automat does not stiffen the ski, which optimises comfort for the skier.
- this advantage can also be achieved with any other automatic front mechanism or any automatic heel mechanism of a touring ski binding of the second type mentioned above, if the supporting structure, such as the housing here, is attached to the SI ⁇ i at one end, while the other end of the supporting structure is held in the longitudinal guide of the hold-down element attached to the SI ⁇ i and can move in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the hold-down element.
- the front machine can also be attached to an SI ⁇ i in a different way.
- the front machine can comprise a housing which can be firmly attached to the SI ⁇ i, with the front machine comprising a separate hold-down element. This has the advantage, for example, that the front machine can be manufactured more simply and therefore more cost-effectively.
- FIGS 1a, 1b and 1c each show an oblique view of a front machine 1 according to the invention.
- the front machine 1 is in a release position, in Figure 1b in a holding position and in Figure 1c shown in a blocking position.
- the front automaton 1 is aligned from the bottom right to the top left. If the front automaton 1 is mounted on a SI ⁇ i (not shown), the bottom right of the SI ⁇ i corresponds to the back in these figures, while the top left of the SI ⁇ i corresponds to the front. Therefore, in these figures the longitudinal direction of the ski runs along an axis from the bottom right to the top left.
- top and bottom also for front machine 1 top and bottom.
- the front automaton 1 comprises a housing 2, a control lever 3 and a plastic tread 4.
- the front automaton 1 also comprises two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 made of aluminum, each with a retaining spur 6.1, 6.2 made of steel.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are arranged laterally, opposite each other in the cross-ski direction. They are each pivotably mounted around an axis 9.1, 9.2 (see Figure 3 ). These two axes 9.1, 9.2 are each arranged in a lower area of the front automaton 1 and are aligned in a plane parallel to the ski, converging backwards at an angle of 6 degrees to the longitudinal direction of the ski (see Figure 10 ).
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 can essentially be pivoted in the transverse direction of the ski.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are mounted on a positive control 20.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 each have a control bracket 8.1, 8.2 above this bearing on a side facing the middle of the ski.
- the control brackets 8.1, 8.2 in an upper area of the upward-pointing free ends of the pivot levers 5.1, 5.2, the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 are arranged pointing towards the middle of the ski.
- the ski boot to be stored should have bearing bushes attached to the side of the toe area into which the retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 can engage (see Figure 2 ).
- the tread 4 In front of the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2, the tread 4 is pivotably mounted in the middle of the ski about a horizontal transverse axis 7 aligned in the transverse direction of the ski. A free end of the tread 4 extends above the forced control 20 to the rear between the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2.
- the tread 4 In the release position ( Figure 1a ), the tread 4 is pivoted slightly upwards so that its free end is positioned above the housing 2. In the holding position ( Figure 1b ) and in the blocking position (1c), however, its free end is folded downwards and rests on the housing 2.
- control lever 3 is also pivotally mounted around the transverse axis 7.
- a free end of the control lever 3, which is used to actuate it, points forward.
- the release position ( Figure 1a ) it points essentially horizontally forward.
- the control lever 3 is in a release position.
- the locking position ( Figure 1b )
- the free end of the control lever 3 points diagonally forward and upward, which corresponds to a holding position of the control lever 3.
- the blocking position Figure 1c
- the control lever 3 is in a blocking position.
- the front machine 1 can thus be moved from the release position to the holding position by pulling the control lever 3 up from the release position to the holding position.
- the front machine 1 can be moved further into the blocking position by pulling the control lever 3 up from the holding position further into the blocking position.
- the control lever 3 can therefore be pressed downwards.
- the second distance is dimensioned such that the two retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 can simultaneously engage from opposite sides in laterally mounted bearing bushes in the toe area of a ski boot and can thus support the ski boot.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are also pivoted slightly towards each other.
- the two retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 are at a third distance from each other, which is the same or smaller than the second distance. Accordingly, a ski boot can also be stored in the blocking position by the lateral engagement of the two retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2.
- the ski boot In order to transfer the front automaton 1 from the release position to the holding position, in which a ski boot is stored in the front automaton 1, the ski boot can be positioned in an upright, parallel position with its toe area between the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 and gently moved downwards.
- the tread 4 is pressed downwards by a sole of the ski boot, whereby the front automaton 1 is transferred to the holding position.
- the two retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 engage in the side bearing bushes of the ski boot by moving the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 together.
- the control lever 3 At the same time, by pressing down the tread spur 4, the control lever 3 is also pivoted up into the holding position.
- the control lever 3 can also be manually raised from the release position to the holding position at the same time.
- the housing 2 has a guide bar 14 which runs in the transverse direction of the ski from a first side to a second side of the housing 2.
- This guide bar 14 is slightly higher than the rest of the housing 2 and serves to prevent a ski boot from being placed completely on the housing 2. In the event of a lateral safety release, it also serves to support a lateral movement of the ski boot and to prevent a sole of the ski boot from getting caught in the rest of the housing 2.
- the guide bar 14 can have a sliding element in its upper area on which the sole of the ski boot can slide.
- a sliding element can be made of Teflon, for example.
- FIG. 2 shows a schematic oblique view of the front machine 1 in the holding position with a ski boot 100 stored in the front machine 1.
- the ski boot 100 has two bearing bushes 101.1, 101.2 in its toe area, into which the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 engage.
- the ski boot 100 is mounted on the front machine 1 so that it can pivot about a horizontal axis aligned in the transverse direction of the ski.
- Figure 3 shows an exploded view of the front machine 1.
- the perspective of the illustration is the same as in the Figures 1a, 1b and 1c
- further components of the front machine 1 can be seen, which are in the Figures 1a, 1b and 1c as well as in the Figure 2 are covered by the housing 2.
- the front machine 1 comprises a flat base plate 30 made of metal, which closes off the housing 2, which is otherwise open at the bottom.
- the base plate 30 has four vertically aligned openings 31.1, 31.2, 31.3, 31.4 in an essentially square arrangement.
- these openings 31.1, 31.2, 31.3, 31.4 are located in correspondence with four vertically aligned openings 32.1, 32.2, 32.3, 32.4 in the housing 2.
- one of these openings 32.1, 32.2, 32.3, 32.4 is arranged in front of and behind the pivot levers 5.1, 5.2. They serve to fasten the front automat 1 to a SI ⁇ i by means of screws.
- a piston 35 made of plastic.
- This piston 35 is aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- a guide aligned in its longitudinal direction which can engage with a corresponding counterpart in the housing 2.
- This guide guides the piston 35 in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the piston 35 In its rear area, the piston 35 has an opening into which a spiral spring 36 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski is inserted.
- this spiral spring 36 abuts against a locking nut 37, which is screwed with a thread onto an adjusting screw 38 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- a head of the adjusting screw 38 is mounted in an opening 39 in a rear-facing side wall of the housing 2.
- the adjusting screw 38 can be rotated from the outside through the opening 39.
- a guide element 50 made of plastic is mounted in the housing 2.
- This guide element 50 has an arm pointing backwards on both sides in a rear area.
- the guide element 50 also has a short arm pointing forwards on both sides in a front area.
- These two arms each comprise an upward-pointing knob 51.1, 51.2 in a front area.
- To the rear, these two arms are separated from a central area 53 of the guide element 50 by a plate that is aligned vertically and in the cross-ski direction and forms a front stop 52.
- This central area 53 is plate-shaped and aligned horizontally.
- the positive control 20 is mounted in the middle region 53 so that it can move in the transverse direction of the ski. It is guided between the front stop 52 and the rear stop and is accordingly prevented from moving in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the guide element 50.
- the forced control 20 comprises two side levers 20.1, 20.2 and a control plate 20.3.
- the latter is mounted in the guide element 50 as described above so that it can move in the transverse direction of the ski.
- On both sides of the control plate 20.3, one of the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 is arranged in the transverse direction of the ski.
- the mounting of the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 on the control plate 20.3 consists of a second sliding guide 21.1, 21.2 in the control plate 20.3 with a second sliding block 22.1, 22.2 mounted therein, which is attached to the corresponding side lever 20.1, 20.2.
- the second sliding guides 21.1, 21.2 are aligned in such a way that they allow a relative movement of the control plate 20.3 to the side levers 20.1, 20.2 in the longitudinal direction of the ski, whereby the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 are pulled together or pushed apart.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are mounted on the outer ends of the side levers 20.1, 20.2.
- the side levers 20.1, 20.2 each comprise a first sliding guide 23.1, 23.2, in which a first sliding block 24.1, 24.2 arranged on the corresponding pivot lever 5.1, 5.2 is mounted.
- the first sliding blocks 24.1, 24.2 are arranged on the respective pivot lever 5.1, 5.2 above the axes 9.1, 9.2, around which the pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivotally mounted on the housing 2.
- control plate 20.3 has two notches 27.1, 27.2, which are arranged next to one another on a side of the control plate 20.3 facing forward.
- Two latches 28.1, 28.2 attached to the control lever 3 can engage in these two notches 27.1, 27.2. This can prevent the control plate 20.3 from moving in the transverse direction of the ski in the blocking position.
- the spiral spring 36 When the front automaton 1 is mounted, the spiral spring 36 is pre-tensioned between the piston 35 and the locking nut 37. To the rear, it is supported by the locking nut 37 and the adjusting screw 38 on an inner side of the housing 2. By turning the The preload of the spiral spring 36 can be adjusted by means of the adjusting screw 38, which moves the locking nut 37 forwards or backwards. Accordingly, the spiral spring 36 presses the piston 35 forwards with an adjustable force, where the piston 35 is supported against the control plate 20.3.
- the piston 35 has a laterally rounded, front end with a horizontal slot. In this slot, a round steel disk 40 is aligned horizontally and mounted so as to be rotatable about a vertical axis 41.
- the piston 35 abuts against this steel disk 40 in a laterally flattened recess 25 in the control plate 20.3.
- the steel disk 40 rolls along the corresponding flank of the laterally flattened recess 25 in the control plate 20.3 out of the recess 25 (see Figures 8a, 8b and 8c ).
- the piston 35 is pressed backwards against the preload of the spiral spring 36.
- the strength of the restoring force can be adjusted by adjusting the preload of the spiral spring 36.
- the lateral flattened recess 25 it is possible for the lateral flattened recess 25 to have a recess 42.1, 42.2 on each side, into which the steel disk 40 of the piston 35 can engage when the front automatic device 1 is in the safety release position. In this way, the restoring force acting on the control plate 20.3 can be minimized or completely eliminated in the safety release position.
- FIGs 4a, 4b and 4c show three different views of the front machine 1 in the release position.
- the front machine 1 is shown from below, with the base plate 30 and the guide element 50 (see Figure 3 ) are hidden.
- Figure 4b shows a vertical longitudinal section through the front automaton 1 along the middle of the ski and
- Figure 4c shows a vertical cross-section through the forced control 20, seen from the front.
- the control plate 20.3 is shifted backwards relative to the two side levers 20.1, 20.2, as a result of which the second sliding blocks 22.1, 22.2 are located at a front end of the second sliding guides 21.1, 21.2.
- the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 are thereby moved apart.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are also pivoted apart accordingly.
- the control plate 20.3 in the housing 2 is shifted backwards into a rear position.
- the piston 35 is accordingly pressed backwards against the spiral spring 36.
- Figure 4b shows that the control lever 3 is in the release position and that the tread 4 is pivoted upwards. It can also be seen that the tread 4 runs in its front area in the control lever 3 and has an upward-pointing shoulder 10, which with its rear edge rests against a downward-pointing counterpart 11 of the control lever 3. Therefore, the control lever 3 is pivoted upwards when the tread 4 is pressed downwards, or the tread 4 is pivoted upwards when the control lever 3 is pivoted downwards into the release position.
- control plate 20.3 is guided in the guide element 50 and that the piston 35 presses forwards from behind with the steel disk 40 against the control plate 20.3.
- the control plate 20.3 is held in its rear position by the guide element 50 with the front stop 52 abutting forwards against a detent 12 arranged on the control lever 3 (see also Figure 6d ).
- FIGS. 5a, 5b and 5c show the same views of the front machine 1 as the Figures 4a, 4b and 4c .
- the front machine 1 is in the Figures 5a, 5b and 5c but in the holding position.
- Figure 5b shows that the tread 4 is pivoted downwards around the transverse axis 7 and rests on the housing 2. It can also be seen that the control lever 3 is pivoted upwards slightly and is in the holding position. In comparison to the release position (see Figure 4b ) the piston 35 and the control plate 20.3 are slightly shifted forward. In contrast to the Figure 4b is here in Figure 5b the guide element 50 is hidden.
- FIGs 6a, 6b and 6c show the same views of the front machine 1 as the Figures 4a, 4b and 4c or 5a, 5b and 5c.
- the front machine 1 is in the blocking position.
- Figure 6d shows similar to the Figure 6b a vertical longitudinal section through the front automatic device 1 in the blocking position.
- the vertical longitudinal section does not run along the middle of the ski, however, but is offset slightly from the middle of the ski to the side. It runs through one of the two arms of the guide element 50 running forwards and through the knob 51.2 arranged on this arm.
- the guide element 50 and the control plate 20.3 mounted therein are also pulled forwards in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the second sliding blocks 22.1, 22.2 to be pulled together by the second sliding guides 21.1, 21.2
- the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 and the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are further pulled together with the retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 (see Figure 6a ). Therefore, in the blocking position, the Retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 at a third distance from each other, which is the same size or smaller than the second distance. How large the third distance actually is depends on the ski boot which is stored in the front automatic device 1.
- the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 are pulled together in the blocking position by pulling up the control lever 3 until they rest in the lateral bearing bushes of the ski boot. This resting prevents the control lever 3 from being pulled up any further via the pivoting levers 5.1, 5.2 and the forced control 20. How far the control lever 3 can be pulled up in the blocking position therefore depends on the width of the ski boot or on the distance between the lateral bearing bushes in the toe area of the ski boot.
- This pulling together of the two retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 in the blocking position can also be carried out by a slightly modified mechanism.
- the arms of the guide element 50 running forwards can have a ratchet which runs essentially semicircularly towards the front and upwards, with the curve radius decreasing towards the top.
- one knob can be arranged on each side of the control lever 3 in the area below the transverse axis 7.
- the control lever 3 can use these knobs to press on the two ratchets on the arms of the guide element 50 pointing forwards. The further the control lever 3 is pulled upwards in the blocking position, the further the knobs are pulled over the ratchets on the guide element 50.
- the curve radius of the ratchets tapering towards the top pulls the guide element 50 and the control plate 20.3 mounted therein forwards in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 can be pulled together with the retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 via the second sliding guides 21.1, 21.2 and the second sliding blocks 22.1, 22.2.
- the two latches 28.2 are inserted into the corresponding notches 27.2 in the control plate 20.3 by pulling up the control lever 3 (see Figure 3 ). This blocks movement of the control plate 20.3 and thus of the entire forced control 20 in the transverse direction of the ski.
- the detent 12 If the control lever 3 is swung downwards from the blocking position into the holding position, the detent 12 is moved backwards away from the knobs 51.2 of the guide element 50. In doing so, the detent 12 hits the first stop 52 of the guide element 50. If the control lever 3 is now swung further downwards into the release position, the detent 12 presses the first stop 52 backwards. As a result, the guide element 50 with the control plate 20.3 mounted therein is moved backwards against the piston 35 and against the preload of the spiral spring 36 (see Figure 4b ).
- FIGS. 7a, 7b and 7c each show a vertical cross-section through the front automatic device 1, seen from the front, running through the forced control 20, and a schematically shown section through a lower area of the ski boot 100.
- the sequence of figures illustrates a lateral safety release of the front automatic device 1.
- the ski boot 100 is released from the front automatic device 1 to the right. Viewed in the forward direction, the movement of the ski boot 100 is to the left.
- the terms "right” and “left” refer to the illustration shown.
- the front machine 1 is in the holding position.
- the illustration corresponds to the Figure 5c shown representation of the front automatic device 1.
- the additional schematic representation of the ski boot 100 shows how the ski boot 100 is mounted in the front automatic device 1. This shows that a lower area of the sole of the ski boot 100 almost touches the control plates 8.1, 8.2 of the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2.
- the forced control 20 consisting of the control plate 20.3 and the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 is located snugly centered in the front automatic device 1. As already described, the forced control 20 can be moved in the transverse direction of the ski in the holding position.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivoted to the right, the two retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 are also moved together with the ski boot 100 almost to one end of a dynamic path.
- the lower area of the sole of the ski boot 100 touches the control bracket 8.1 of the corresponding pivot lever 5.1 on the right.
- the retaining spur 6.1 of this pivot lever 5.1 is just released from the corresponding bearing bush 101.1 of the ski boot 100. Accordingly, the retaining spur 6.1 cannot dig into the bearing bush 101.1 of the ski boot 100 and also cannot prevent the ski boot 100 from becoming detached from the front automatic device 1 by getting caught on the sole of the ski boot 100.
- the first two sliding blocks 24.1, 24.2 are located essentially above the axes 9.1, 9.2, around which the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 can be pivoted ( Figure 7a ).
- the forced control 20 is moved to the right, the two swivel levers 5.1, 5.2 are swiveled to the right.
- the first two sliding blocks 24.1, 24.2 are also pivoted to the right. Due to their arrangement relative to the axes 9.1, 9.2, the first two sliding blocks 24.1, 24.2 are also moved slightly downwards. Therefore, they are no longer at the upper end, but between the upper end and the bend of the first sliding block guides 23.1, 23.2.
- the first two sliding blocks 24.1, 24.2 are in the bend of the first sliding block guides 23.1, 23.2.
- the first sliding block 24.2 of the left pivot lever 5.2 hits the first sliding block guide 23.2 of the corresponding side lever 20.2 and thus prevents the forced control 20 from moving further to the right.
- the forced control 20 is moved so far to the right that the first sliding block 24.1 of the right pivot lever 5.1 is pushed from the bend into the first guide rail 23.1 is released and can move freely in the curved section of the first guide rail 23.1 of the corresponding side lever 20.1.
- the ski boot 100 is released from the front automatic device 1.
- the Figures 8a, 8b and 8c illustrate how the Figures 7a, 7b and 7c a lateral safety release of the front automatic device 1.
- the front automatic device 1 is in the same positions in the illustrations as in the illustrations of the Figures 7a, 7b and 7c .
- the Figures 8a, 8b and 8c However, they show the front machine 1 from below, with the base plate 30 and the guide element 50 (see Figure 3 ) are hidden.
- the Figure 8a equals to Figure 5a . It shows the forced control 20 consisting of the control plate 20.3 and the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 centered in the front machine 1.
- the Figure 8b shows the forced control 20 in a position close to the end of the forced control path. Accordingly, the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivoted almost to the end of the dynamic range.
- the Figure 8c the forced control 20 at the end of the forced control path.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivoted to the end of the dynamic range, whereby the pivot lever 5.1, which is in the pivoting direction, is released by the forced control 20 and tilted downwards.
- the control plate 20.3 has a laterally flattened recess 25. Since the control plate 20.3 in the Figures 8b and 8c is moved sideways from its central position, the piston 35 is pressed backwards from the corresponding flank of the recess 25 in the control plate 20.3 out of the recess 25 against the preload of the spiral spring 36. Due to the flank of the recess 25 being aligned at an angle to the spring force, a restoring force is exerted on the control plate 20.3, which drives the control plate 20.3 back to its central position.
- This restoring force and the path that a ski boot stored in the front automatic device 1 travels from its central position to the end of the dynamic path provide a maximum energy, which the front automatic device 1 can absorb without a lateral safety release occurring.
- This maximum energy can be set by pre-tensioning the spiral spring 36 by means of the adjusting screw 38 and the locking nut 37.
- the side safety release which is in the Figures 7a, 7b, 7c , as well as 8a, 8b and 8c, can also be done on the other side, not shown here.
- the release process is the same.
- the front automat 1 not only allows a lateral safety release, but also a release in the forward direction. This front release can take place when the front automat 1 is in the holding position or in the blocking position.
- the Figure 9 a vertical longitudinal section through the front automatic device 1 in the blocking position.
- a ski boot 100 is stored in the front automatic device 1.
- a heel of the ski boot 100 is free, whereby the ski boot 100 can be pivoted upwards with the heel.
- the ski boot 100 is shown tilted forwards, with a toe area 102 of the ski boot 100 touching the control lever 3. If a skier who uses a front automatic device 1 falls forwards, the ski boot 100 can be pushed further than in the Figure 9 shown.
- the front automatic device 1 can be used in a touring binding system together with a heel automatic device (not shown).
- the heel automatic device should enable storage of the ski boot 100 in a heel area.
- a downhill position in which the front automatic device 1 is in the holding position and in which the ski boot 100 is stored in its toe area in the front automatic device 1 and in its heel area on the heel automatic device.
- a touring binding system enables an ascent position in which the ski boot 100 is stored in the front automatic device 1 and released by the heel automatic device. In this ascent position, the front automatic device 1 can be in the holding position or in the blocking position. In both positions, it enables a pivoting movement of the ski boot 100 about a transverse axis of the ski and accordingly enables a walking movement of a skier.
- the front automatic mechanism 1 enables a lateral safety release in the holding position. If a ski boot 100 is stored in a touring binding system with the front automatic mechanism 1 and the touring binding system is in the downhill position, the touring binding system enables a lateral safety release. If, for example, the ski boot 100 is stored on the heel automatic mechanism by holding spurs pointing from back to front, the ski boot 100 can perform a rotary movement in the event of such a lateral safety release. It is first released laterally from the front automatic mechanism 1 while it is still held by the holding spurs of the heel automatic mechanism. As soon as the ski boot 100 is released from the front automatic mechanism 1, it can also be released from the heel automatic mechanism by moving or rotating it away from the holding spurs of the heel automatic mechanism. Accordingly, a lateral safety release option via the heel automatic mechanism is no longer necessary. It is sufficient if the heel unit enables a safety release in the forward direction.
- the front automat 1 is optimized for a lateral safety release in a touring binding system where the heel automat does not allow a lateral safety release.
- This optimization is in the Figure 10 which shows a view of the front machine 1 in the holding position with the safety shoe 100 held therein, illustrated.
- Two dashed lines are shown along which the axes 9.1, 9.2 (see Figure 3 ), around which the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 can be pivoted.
- These two straight lines 15.1, 15.2 run backwards at an angle of 6 degrees to the longitudinal axis of the ski and intersect at a point 16 in the heel area of the ski boot 100.
- the ski boot 100 Since the heel mechanism does not allow a lateral safety release, the ski boot 100 is rotated about a vertical axis near point 16 in the event of a lateral safety release until it is released from the front mechanism 1. As a result, the pivoting movement of the pivot lever 5.1, 5.2 located in the direction of movement runs perpendicular to the direction of movement of the ski boot 100. Accordingly, the alignment of the axes 9.1, 9.2 is optimized for a rotary movement of the ski boot 100 in the event of a lateral safety release.
- FIGS 11a and 11b Similar to the Figures 8a and 8b show the Figures 11a and 11b the front automaton 1 in the holding position or in a position in which the forced control 20 is at the end of the forced control path.
- the front automaton 1 is shown from below in each case, with the base plate 30 and the guide element 50 hidden.
- Figure 11c again shows the front machine 1 in the holding position from below, whereby the base plate 30 is hidden, while the guide element 50 is shown.
- the front machine 1 which is in the Figures 11a, 11b and 11c has two differences compared to the previously shown front automaton 1. These differences illustrate further design options for the front automaton 1.
- the first difference is that the piston 35 is guided by a knob in a cut in the guide element 50 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski (see Figure 11c ). Since the I ⁇ bolben 35 is guided at the top and bottom in the longitudinal direction of the ski, the I ⁇ bolben 35 is guided better in the longitudinal direction of the ski, so that a better Power transmission from the piston 35 to the control plate 20.3 is achieved, thereby minimising friction losses.
- the second difference is that the laterally flattened recess 25 has a recess 42.1, 42.2 on each side, into which the steel disk 40 of the piston 35 can engage when the front automat 1 is in the safety release position (see Figures 11a and 11b b).
- the restoring force acting on the control plate 20.3 can be minimized or completely eliminated in the safety release position. Accordingly, the pivoting of the corresponding pivot lever 5.1 is made easier, since the minimized or eliminated restoring force also minimizes or eliminates the frictional resistance for the pivoting movement of the pivot lever 5.1.
- FIGS. 12a, 12b and 12c show a similar view of the front machine 1 as the Figures 11a, 11b and 11c , whereby the Figures 12a, 12b and 12c but illustrate another possible design.
- the piston 35 does not have a steel disk 40 at its tip.
- a pivoting element 43 is arranged between the piston 35 and the control plate 20.3.
- This pivoting element 43 is pivotally mounted in its center about a vertically aligned pivot axis 44.
- To the front it has a rounded, first foot 45.1, which engages in the laterally flattened recess 25 of the control plate 20.3.
- the pivoting element On both sides of the center of the ski, the pivoting element also has a second and third foot 45.2, 45.3, each facing backwards, behind the pivot axis 44.
- these two feet 45.2, 45.3 are supported backwards against the piston 35 (see Figure 12a ).
- the first foot 45.1 of the swivel element 43 is moved along with it, whereby the swivel element 43 is swiveled about its axis 44 (see Figure 12b ).
- the foot 45.2 of the swivel element which lies in the direction of movement of the positive control 20 presses the piston 35 backwards, while the other foot 45.3 no longer touches the piston 35.
- the front automaton 1 is shown in the holding position from below, with the base plate 30 hidden, while the guide element 50 is shown.
- the Figures 13a and 13b each show a vertical cross-section through the front machine 1, seen from the front, through the forced control 20.
- the forced control 20 of the front machine 1 is located at one end of the forced control path.
- the Figure 13a is the one in the Figures 11a, 11b and 11c shown execution option, while in the Figure 13b that in the Figures 12a, 12b and 12c shown.
- Both differ from the previously described design options in that the curved sections of the first sliding guides 23.1, 23.2 become wider towards the bottom. This allows the first sliding blocks 24.1, 24.3 to move in the curved section of the first sliding guides 23.1, 23.2 with less frictional resistance. This makes it easier to move the corresponding pivot lever 5.1, 5.2 away in the safety release position.
- the retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 which are shown in the Figures 13a, 13b shown, have more rounded free ends. This means that the ski boot can be released more easily from the front automatic device 1 in the event of a lateral safety release. However, this slightly impairs the storage of the ski boot in the front automatic device 1. Accordingly, it is possible that the shape of the free ends of the retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 in the front automatic device 1 is optimized between optimal storage of the ski boot and optimal release of the ski boot from the front automatic device 1. It should be mentioned that the retaining means can also be designed completely differently than the retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 shown here.
- FIGS 14a, 14b, 14c and 14d each show an oblique view of another front machine 201 according to the invention.
- This front machine 201 is shown in the release position.
- the front automaton 201 is shown in the holding position, with the forced control 220 in the Figure 14b is in the middle of the forced control path, while in Figure 14c is located at one end of the forced control path.
- the front automat 201 is in the Figure 14d shown in the safety release position.
- the front automaton 201 is aligned diagonally from top right to bottom left.
- the front automaton 201 is mounted on a SI ⁇ i (not shown), in these figures the top right of the SI ⁇ i corresponds to the back, while the bottom left of the SI ⁇ i corresponds to the front. Therefore, in these figures the longitudinal direction of the ski runs along an axis from top right to bottom left. Furthermore, in the Figures 14a, 14b, 14c and 14d top and bottom also on the front machine 201 top and bottom.
- the front automaton 201 according to the invention shown here differs from the previously described front automaton 1 according to the invention in that the axes (see Figure 15 ) of the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are mounted on the forced control 220 and that the forced control 220 in the holding position together with the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 is essentially movable in the transverse direction of the ski along the forced control path. Accordingly, in Figure 14c It can be seen that the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 together with the forced control 220 are opposite the middle of the forced control path ( Figure 14b ) are displaced along a linear path in the cross-ski direction.
- the pivoting lever 205.1 located in the direction of movement of the forced control 220 can also be tilted away in the safety release position, whereby a ski boot held in the front automatic device 201 (not shown here) can be released.
- Figure 15 shows an exploded view of the Figures 14a, 14b, 14c and 14d Front machines shown 201.
- the perspective of the representation is different. For example, “back” in Figure 15 bottom right, while “front” is at the top left.
- the front machine 201 comprises a substantially flat base plate 230, which closes off the housing 202, which is otherwise open at the bottom.
- This base plate 230 can be made of metal or of another material such as plastic.
- elevations 217.1, 217.2 on the base plate 230 which serve as guides for the positive control 220 and for a guide element 250.
- the base plate 230 has four vertically aligned openings 231.1, 231.2, 231.3, 231.4 in a substantially square arrangement.
- these openings 231.1, 231.2, 231.3, 231.4 are located in correspondence with four vertically aligned openings 232.1, 232.2, 232.3, 232.4 in the housing 202.
- one of these openings 232.1, 232.2, 232.3, 232.4 is located in front of and behind the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2. They are used to attach the front automat 201 to a SI ⁇ i by means of screws.
- a piston 235 made of plastic.
- This piston 235 is aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski and guided in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the piston 235 In its rear area the piston 235 has an opening into which a spiral spring 236 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski is inserted.
- This spiral spring 236 abuts with its rear end against a locking nut 237 which is screwed with a thread onto an adjusting screw 238 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- a head of the adjusting screw 238 is mounted in an opening 239 in a rear-facing side wall of the housing 202.
- the adjusting screw 238 can be rotated from the outside through the opening 239.
- the guide element 250 made of steel, aluminum or plastic is mounted on the base plate 230 in the housing 202.
- This guide element 250 has a bearing bush in a rear area for mounting a second vertical axis 249 and in a front area on both sides an upward-pointing knob 251.1, 251.2.
- the guide element 250 has, viewed in the longitudinal direction of the ski, in a central area a plate which is aligned vertically and in the transverse direction of the ski and forms a front stop 252, which delimits a central area 253 of the guide element 250 towards the front.
- This central area 253 is plate-shaped and aligned horizontally. It has an arm 254.1, 254.1 on both sides, which are directed laterally from the front to the rear.
- the forced control 220 is mounted on the central area 253 so that it can move in the transverse direction of the ski. It is guided between the front stop 252 and the second vertical axis 249 and is accordingly prevented from moving in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the guide element 250.
- the forced control 220 comprises two side levers 220.1, 220.2, a swivel element 220.3 and a slide 220.4.
- the slide 220.4 is between the guide element 250 at the bottom and the housing 202 at the top and is mounted so as to be movable at the front and rear in the transverse direction of the ski. It comprises an essentially flat, horizontally oriented upper surface and a surface at the front and rear each oriented essentially vertically in the transverse direction of the ski. Therefore, a vertical cross-section in the longitudinal direction of the ski through the carriage 220.4 has an n-shaped shape that is open at the bottom and flattened at the top.
- the pivoting element 220.3 When the front automatic device 201 is assembled, the pivoting element 220.3 is arranged so as to extend from the rear below the upper surface of the carriage 220.4.
- the pivoting element 220.3 is pivotable in its front region by a first vertical axis 248 in a horizontal plane and is mounted on the carriage 220.4 so as to be movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the first vertical axis 248 In order to facilitate the pivoting movement of the pivoting element 220.3, the first vertical axis 248 has a roller that rotates around the first vertical axis 248.
- one of the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 Viewed in the transverse direction of the ski, on both sides of the pivot element 220.3, one of the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 is mounted on the slide 220.4 below the upper surface of the carriage 220.4 in the transverse direction of the ski.
- the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are each mounted on the pivot element 220.3 by a second sliding guide 221.1, 221.2 in the pivot element 220.3 with a second sliding block 222.1, 222.2 mounted therein and arranged on the corresponding side lever 220.1, 220.2.
- These two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 each comprise a roller which encloses the cylindrical core of the corresponding second sliding block 222.1, 222.2. These rollers serve to ensure that the second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 can be moved with less friction losses in the corresponding second sliding block guide 221.1, 221.2.
- the second link guides 221.1, 221.2 are arranged in such a way that they allow a movement of the pivoting element 220.3 in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the rest of the forced control 220 and thus the side levers 220.1, 220.2 as well as a rotational movement of the pivoting element 220.3 relative to the rest of the forced control 220 and thus the side levers 220.1, 220.2.
- the pivoting element 220.3 rotates, the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are kept at the same distance from each other, while they are pushed apart or pulled together by a relative movement in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the pulling together is carried out by the two arms 254.1, 254.2 of the central region 253 of the guide element 250. which can also interact with the second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 when the guide element 250 is moved backwards.
- one of the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 is mounted so as to be pivotable about an axis 209.1, 209.2.
- These two axes 209.1, 209.2 are arranged in a plane parallel to the slide, with two straight lines defined by the two axes 209.1, 209.2 being aligned almost parallel to the ski and converging towards the rear at an angle of approximately 6 degrees.
- the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are mounted on the outer ends of the side levers 220.1, 220.2.
- the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 each have a first sliding block 224.1, 224.2 at their lower ends, which each has a cylindrical cross-section and is aligned parallel to the axis 209.1, 209.3 of the corresponding lever 205.1, 205.1.
- These two first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are each mounted in a first sliding block guide 223.1, 223.2 of the corresponding side lever 220.1, 220.2 in the holding position and in the release position.
- the carriage 220.4 has two notches 227.1, 227.2 on its front, upper side edge. Two latches 228.1, 228.2 attached to the control lever 203 can engage in these two notches 227.1, 227.2. This can prevent the carriage 220.4 from moving in the transverse direction of the ski in the blocking position.
- the carriage 220.4 When the front automatic device 201 is in the holding position, the carriage 220.4 can be moved in the cross-ski direction along the forced control path.
- the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 and the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are also moved with the carriage 220.4.
- the pivot element 220.3 which is mounted in its front area by the first axis 248 on the carriage 220.4 and in its rear area by the second axis 249 on the guide element 250, is pivoted along the forced control path. This moves the two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 in the second sliding guides 221.1, 221.2, with the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 being kept at the same distance from each other.
- the spiral spring 236 When the front automatic device 201 is assembled, the spiral spring 236 is pre-tensioned between the piston 235 and the locking nut 237. To the rear, it is supported by the locking nut 237 and the adjusting screw 238 on an inner side of the housing 202. By turning the adjusting screw 238, which moves the locking nut 237 forwards or backwards, the pre-tension of the spiral spring 236 can be adjusted. Accordingly, the spiral spring 236 presses the piston 235 forwards with an adjustable force, where the piston 235 is supported against the pivot element 220.3.
- the piston 235 has a front end with two laterally chamfered, vertically aligned surfaces which fit into a V-shaped recess in the rear end of the pivot element 220.3.
- the pivoting element 220.3 When the carriage 220.4 is in the middle of the forced control path, the pivoting element 220.3 is aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski and the piston 235 presses into the V-shaped recess in the rear end of the pivoting element 220.3.
- the pivoting element 220.3 When the carriage 220.4 is moved sideways along the forced control path, the pivoting element 220.3 is pivoted sideways as described.
- the V-shaped recess in the rear end of the pivoting element 220.3 is also pivoted, with a flank of the V-shaped recess, which lies in the direction of movement of the forced control 220, being pressed against the piston 235.
- the Figures 16a and 16b each show an enlarged section of the Figure 15 shown exploded view of the front automaton 201. It shows one of the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2, the retaining spur 206.1, 206.2 arranged in the upper area of the corresponding pivot lever 205.1, 205.2, the associated axle 209.1, 209.2, and the associated side lever 220.1, 220.2. This shows that the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 have a width in the longitudinal direction of the ski which corresponds to approximately three times the length of the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2. It can also be seen that the cylindrical first Slide blocks 224.1, 224.2 are arranged in the middle of the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 when viewed in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 viewed in the longitudinal direction of the ski, also have a width which corresponds to approximately three times the length of the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2. It can also be seen that the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 have an upwardly open hook on their side facing away from the center of the ski in the lower area, which is part of the first sliding block guide 223.1, 223.2. These hooks, viewed in the longitudinal direction of the ski, have an extension which essentially corresponds to the length of the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 and are each arranged in the middle of the corresponding side lever 220.1, 220.2, viewed in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 each have a vertically aligned surface in the lower area on their side facing away from the center of the ski, which form the stops 219.1, 219.2 of the first link guides 223.1, 223.2. Above these lower areas, the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 each have a surface with a concave, essentially quarter-cylindrical curvature on their side facing away from the center of the ski. These curvatures run from the bottom outside upwards towards the center of the ski.
- the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are mounted in the hooks of the first sliding block guides 223.1, 223.2 both in the holding position and in the release position.
- the stops 218.1, 218.2 of the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are arranged opposite the stops 219.1, 219.2 of the side levers 220.1, 220.2. Accordingly, in the holding position and In the release position, a force acting outwards from the center of the ski on one of the retaining spurs 206.1, 206.2 creates a torque on the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 mounted on the axes 209.1, 209.2, whereby the lower areas of the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are pressed towards the center of the ski.
- the stops 218.1, 218.2 of the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are pressed against the stops 219.1, 219.2 of the side levers 220.1, 220.2 and the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 can be prevented from pivoting by the side levers 220.1, 220.1.
- the pivot levers 205.2 each have a control bar 208.2 below the holding spur 206.2.
- the control bars 208.2 are a substantially rectangular block which is arranged on the side of the respective pivot lever 205.2 facing the middle of the ski, with a longitudinal axis of the control bars 208.2 being aligned pointing from the holding spur 206.2 to the axis 209.2.
- FIGs 17a and 17b each show a cross-section through the front machine 201 in the release position.
- the cross section runs vertically in the cross direction of the ski and a sectional view from the front is shown.
- Figure 17b In contrast, the cross-section runs in a horizontal direction and a sectional view from below is shown.
- Figure 17a shows that in the front automatic device 201, the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are pivoted apart in the release position so that the two retaining spurs 206.1, 206.2 are at the first distance from each other. Since the cross section, viewed in the longitudinal direction of the ski, runs through a center of the side levers 220.1, 220.2 and the leg levers 205.1, 205.2, it can be seen how the cylindrical first guide stones 224.1, 224.2 are mounted in the hooks of the first guide guides 223.1, 223.2. Since the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are moved towards each other, the lower areas of the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are moved towards each other and the retaining spurs 206.1, 206.2 located above the axes 209.1, 209.2 are moved apart.
- the two second guide rails 221.1, 221.2 of the pivot element 220.3 extend further forward and also keep the second guide rails 222.1, 222.2 and thus the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 pulled together in the release position.
- the geometry of the pivot element 220.3 must be adapted so that the pivot element 220.3 can continue to fulfill the other functions described below.
- FIGs 18a and 18b each show a cross-section through the front automaton 201 in the holding position, with the forced control 220 located in the middle of the forced control path.
- the cross section runs vertically in the cross direction of the ski and a sectional view from the front is shown.
- the cross-section runs in a horizontal direction and a sectional view from below is shown.
- Figure 18a shows that in the front automatic device 201, the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are pivoted together in the holding position, so that the two holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 are at a second distance from each other. Since the cross section, viewed in the longitudinal direction of the ski, runs through a center of the side levers 220.1, 220.2 and the leg levers 205.1, 205.2, it can be seen how the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are also mounted in the hooks of the first sliding block guides 223.1, 223.2 in the holding position.
- FIGs 19a and 19b show how the Figures 18a and 18b a cross-section through the front machine 201 in the holding position.
- the cross section runs vertically in the cross direction of the ski and a sectional view from the front is shown.
- the cross section runs horizontally and a sectional view from below is shown.
- the override control 220 is located almost at one end of the override control path.
- Figure 19a shows that in the front machine 201 in the holding position with the forced control 220, almost at one end of the forced control path, the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are also pivoted together and that the two holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 are also at the second distance from each other.
- the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are still mounted in the hooks of the first sliding guides 223.1, 223.2 and that the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are also still moved apart, whereby the lower areas of the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are moved apart, while the holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 located above the axes 209.1, 209.2 are moved together.
- pivoting element 220.3 is pivoted in the direction of movement of the carriage 220.4 when the carriage 220.4 is moved away from the center of the forced control path in the transverse direction of the ski.
- the pivoting element 220.3 is fixed in its front area to the first vertical axis 248 in the groove 225 (see Figure 17a ) on the carriage 220.4 and in its rear area on the second vertical axis 249 at the top in a groove 226 in the housing 202 running in the longitudinal direction of the ski and at the bottom on the guide element 250 (not visible here).
- the pivoting element 220.3 is pivotally mounted in the groove 225 in the carriage 220.4 as well as in the groove 226 in the housing 202 and is movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski, the pivoting element 220.3 is displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the position of the pivoting element 220.3 in the longitudinal direction of the ski is controlled by the bearing of the lower end of the second vertical axis 249 in the guide element 250 by a corresponding positioning of the guide element 250 in the longitudinal direction of the ski (see also Figures 15 and 21a, 22 and 23a).
- the two second sliding block guides 221.1, 221.2 run towards each other from the back to the front in a curved form. They extend on both sides of the first vertical axis 248 from behind the first vertical Axis 248 to the first vertical axis 248. If the swivel element 220.3 is as in Figure 19b shown is pivoted sideways relative to an alignment parallel to the longitudinal direction of the ski, the two second guide rails 221.1, 221.2 are pivoted accordingly.
- the second guide rail 221.2 arranged on the side opposite to the direction of movement of the carriage 220.4 is moved forwards, whereby the corresponding second guide rail 222.2 is located further back in the second guide rail 221.2.
- the second guide rail 221.1 located in the direction of movement of the carriage 220.4 is moved so far back that the corresponding second guide rail 222.2 is moved out of the second guide rail 221.1 and is located at the front end of the pivoting element 220.3.
- This front end of the swivel element 220.3 has a V-shaped recess extending to the rear, the flanks of this V-shape forming a front tip on both sides of the front end of the swivel element 220.3 as shown here.
- the ski boot is held between the holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 and the two holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 cannot be moved closer to each other. Accordingly, the second sliding block 222.1 cannot be moved further in the direction of movement of the carriage 220.4 when the front automatic device 201 is in use, despite being released by the corresponding second sliding block guide 221.1.
- FIGs 20a and 20b each show a cross-section through the front machine 201 in the safety release position.
- the cross section runs vertically in the cross direction of the ski and a sectional view from the front is shown.
- the cross-section runs in a horizontal direction and a sectional view from below is shown.
- Figure 20a shows that in the front automatic device 201, in the safety release position, the forced control 220 is moved to one end of the forced control path.
- the pivot lever 205.2 which is arranged on the side opposite this end of the forced control path, is in the same position as in the holding position (see Figures 18a and 19a ).
- the cylindrical first sliding block 224.2 of this pivot lever 205.2 is mounted in the hook of the corresponding first sliding block guide 223.2.
- the other of the two pivot levers 205.1 is pivoted downwards to the side, whereby the retaining spur 206.1 of this pivot lever 205.1 is moved away and a ski boot is released from the front automatic device 201.
- the The second sliding block 221.1 which is located in the direction of movement of the carriage 220.4, is moved so far to the rear that the corresponding second sliding block 222.1 is moved beyond the tip at the front end of the pivoting element 220.3.
- the entire corresponding side lever 220.1 with the first sliding block 223.1 arranged on it is moved towards the middle of the ski.
- this movement of the side lever 220.1 and the pivot lever 205.1 is driven by a sideways force which acts on the ski boot held in the front automatic device 201.
- the ski boot held in the front automatic device 201 is first pressed in the transverse direction of the ski, whereby the carriage 220.4 is moved to one end of the forced control path.
- the ski boot remains held in the carriage 220.4, with energy being absorbed by the movement of the carriage 220.4 and the forced control 220 against the restoring force of the spiral spring 236.
- the ski boot still exerts a force on the pivot lever 205.1 lying in the direction of movement even when it has reached the end of the dynamic path. Because the side lever 220.1 belonging to this pivot lever 205.1 is released at the end of the forced control path from the pivot element 220.3 to the middle of the ski, the pivot lever 205.1 can be pushed further to the side away from the ski boot. When the pivot lever 205.1 is pushed away in this way, the ski boot is initially still held in the bearing bush in the ski boot by the retaining spur 206.1. However, as soon as the pivot lever 205.1 has reached a certain pivot angle, the control bar 208.1 of the pivot lever 205.1 begins to come into contact with the sole of the ski boot. to cooperate, whereby the retaining spur 206.1 is released from the bearing bush of the ski boot and the ski boot is released accordingly.
- the second sliding block 222.1 of the side lever 220.1 is also pressed into the V-shaped recess at the front end of the pivot element 220.3.
- This mechanism has the effect that the second sliding block 222.1, due to its positioning in the V-shaped recess at the front end of the pivot element 220.3, prevents the pivot element 220.3 from snapping back into an orientation parallel to the longitudinal direction of the ski. Accordingly, in the safety release position, the forced control 220 consisting of the slide 220.4, the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 and the pivot element 220.3 is blocked. Despite this blocking of the forced control 220, the pivot lever 205.1 pivoted to the side can pivot freely between a position pivoted to the side and an almost upright position.
- the Figures 21a and 21b each show a vertical longitudinal cross-section through the front automaton 201 in the release position.
- the cross-section runs along the middle of the ski, while in the Figure 21b is slightly offset to the side of the ski.
- the control lever 203 in the release position is positioned with its free end facing forward in the longitudinal direction of the ski. and that the step spur 204 is aligned with its free end obliquely upwards and backwards from the housing 202.
- the guide element 250 is displaced backwards relative to the housing 202.
- the second vertical axis 249 which is mounted with its lower end on the guide element 250, is also moved backwards in the groove 226 in the housing 202.
- FIG. 21b the interaction between the control lever 203, the tread 204 and the guide element 250 is illustrated.
- the control lever 203 and the tread 204 are both mounted on the housing 202 so as to be pivotable about the ski transverse axis 207 which is aligned horizontally in the ski transverse direction.
- the control lever 207 has a rounded block 210 on each side below the ski transverse axis 207. These blocks 210 are arranged between the knobs 251.1, 251.2 and the stop 252 of the guide element 250, viewed in the ski longitudinal direction. In the release position, in which the control lever 203 is pivoted with its free end downwards into an essentially parallel alignment, these blocks 210 are moved backwards accordingly below the ski transverse axis 207.
- the pivoting element 220.3 is also moved backwards against the piston 235 and the restoring force caused by the spiral spring 236, and the two pivoting levers are moved apart as described above.
- the stop 252 of the guide element 250 has a convex curvature on its front side.
- This curvature is dimensioned and positioned in such a way that the two blocks 210 are located just above the curvature in the release position, which prevents a relative movement of the blocks 210 to the curvature and accordingly blocks a forward movement of the guide element 250.
- the blocks 210 When the front automaton 201 is brought into the release position by operating the control lever 203 and the two blocks 210 are moved backwards, the blocks 210 not only push the guide element 250 backwards. They also press in their rear, upper area against a 207 arranged stop 211 on the tread spur 204, whereby the free end of the tread spur 204 is pivoted upwards. If a ski boot is now to be clamped into the front automatic device 201, it is sufficient to lower the ski boot onto the front automatic device 201 in the correct position in the longitudinal direction of the ski. As soon as the sole of the ski boot presses the free end of the tread spur 204 downwards, the blocks 210 are pressed backwards via the stop 211.
- the pressure on the blocks 210 is sufficient for them to be moved over the curvature on the front side of the stop 252 of the guide element 250, whereby the guide element 250 is released to the front and can be moved forwards by the spiral spring 236.
- This movement of the guide element 250 also moves the blocks 210 further forwards via the stop 252 and the control lever 203 is pivoted into a position in which its free end points slightly diagonally upwards.
- the movement of the guide element 250 also moves the pivot element 220.3 forwards, whereby the two pivot levers are pushed together. Accordingly, the front automaton 201 is thereby transferred into the holding position in which the ski boot is held in the holding spurs.
- the Figure 22 shows a vertical longitudinal cross-section along the middle of the ski through the front automatic device 201 in the holding position. It can be seen that the control lever 203 points diagonally upwards and that the free end of the tread 204 points horizontally backwards and rests on the housing 202. It can also be seen that the guide element 250 in the housing 202 is moved forwards and that as a result the second vertical axis 249 and thus the pivot element 220.3 are also moved forwards.
- the Figures 23a and 23b show how the Figures 21a and 21b a vertical longitudinal cross-section through the front machine 201.
- the cross-section runs along the middle of the ski, while in the Figure 23b slightly offset to the side of the ski.
- the front automaton 201 is in the blocking position. This can be seen from the fact that the free end of the control lever 203 is in comparison to the release position ( Figures 21a and 21b ) and to the holding position (see Figure 22 ) has been pulled further up. A transfer of the Control lever 203 in this position results in the two blocks 210 pressing with their front ends against the knobs 251.1, 251.2 of the guide element 250.
- the Figures 24a, 24b and 24c each show a horizontal cross section through the front machine 201.
- the front machine 201 is shown in the release position, while in the Figure 24b in the holding position with the forced control 220 in the middle of the forced control path and in the Figure 24c shown in the blocking position.
- the Figure 24a to get the same representation as Figure 17b while the Figure 24b to get the same representation as Figure 18b is about.
- the sequence of figures 24a, 24b and 24c illustrates how the pivoting element 220.3 is positioned in the release position, the holding position and the blocking position in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- Figure 24a It can be seen that the pivoting element 220.3 in the release position is moved almost behind the two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2. In contrast, the pivoting element 220.3 is further forward in the holding position and in the blocking position, so that the two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 are guided on both sides in the second sliding block guides 221.1, 221.2. In contrast to the holding position, the pivoting element 220.3 is pulled a little further forward in the blocking position.
- the two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 are placed a little further back in the two first sliding block guides 221.1, 221.2 and accordingly moved a little further apart.
- the front automatic device 201 is moved from the holding position to the In the blocking position, the two retaining spurs are moved somewhat closer together. If a ski boot is held in the front automatic device 201, the retaining spurs are pressed further into the two lateral bearing bushes in the toe area of the ski boot when the ski boot is transferred to the blocking position, which means that the ski boot is held even better.
- the slide 220 is also blocked in the middle of the forced control path.
- the carriage 220.4 has two notches 227.1, 227.2 on its front, upper side edge. Two latches 228.1, 228.2 attached to the control lever 203 can engage in these two notches 227.1, 227.2 when the control lever 203 is brought into the blocking position.
- This blocking has the advantage that, for example, when climbing, when the ski boot is only held in the front automatic mechanism 201 and released by the heel automatic mechanism, an unintentional lateral release is prevented.
- the control lever 203 is positioned differently in the release position, the holding position and the blocking position.
- the free end of the control lever 203 is raised in both the blocking position and the holding position compared to the release position. Therefore, the front automat 201 also enables, as already mentioned in Figure 9
- a release in the forward direction is shown, in which the ski boot is pivoted forwards in the front automatic device 201 until a tip of the ski boot presses the control lever 203 downwards into the release position.
- This frontal release can take place both when the front automatic device 201 is in the holding position and in the blocking position.
- the carriage 220.4 is not straight in the cross-ski direction, but is slightly curved backwards on both sides. This curvature corresponds to a circular section of a circle with a radius of about 300 mm.
- the two axes 209.1, 209.2 are not aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski, but converge towards the rear at an angle of 6 degrees.
- this has Figure 10 for the front machine 1 shown to do with the fact that the front machine 201 in a Touring binding system can be used together with a heel mechanism (not shown).
- the front mechanism 201 also enables a lateral safety release in the holding position.
- the ski boot can perform a rotary movement with such a lateral safety release. It is first released laterally from the front mechanism 201 while it is still held by the holding spurs of the heel mechanism. As soon as the ski boot is released from the front mechanism 201, it can also be released from the heel mechanism by moving or rotating it away from the holding spurs of the heel mechanism. Accordingly, a lateral safety release option via the heel mechanism is unnecessary. It is sufficient if the heel mechanism enables a safety release in a forward direction.
- the front automatic mechanism 201 is optimized for a lateral safety release in a touring binding system in which the heel automatic mechanism does not allow a lateral safety release.
- a lateral safety release the ski boot is rotated around a vertical axis until it is released from the front automatic mechanism 201. Due to the alignment of the axes 209.1, 209.2, the pivoting movement of the pivot lever 205.1, 205.2 in the direction of movement runs perpendicular to the direction of movement of the ski boot. Accordingly, the alignment of the axes 209.1, 209.2 is optimized for a rotary movement of the ski boot in the case of a lateral safety release.
- Figure 25 shows an exploded view of another front machine 301 according to the invention from the perspective of an oblique view, in which "back” is at the bottom right of the figure, while “front” is at the top left.
- back is at the bottom right of the figure
- front is at the top left.
- the front automat 301 shown here is constructed very similarly to the front automat 201, which was used in the Figures 14a to 24c is shown. Accordingly, the functioning of the two front machines 201, 301 is also very similar. Structural differences and differences in the functioning of the two front machines 201, 301 are described below. Elements and positions of the front machine 301 shown here that are not described in detail here correspond to the elements or positions of the front machine 201 described above.
- the front machine 301 like the front machine 201 described above, includes, among other things, an essentially flat base plate 330, a housing 302, a control lever 303, a piston 335 and a spiral spring 336.
- the front machine 301 in addition to the two pivot levers 305.1, 305.2, also includes a positive control 320, which in turn includes two side levers 320.1, 320.2, a pivot element 320.3 and a slide 320.4.
- the piston 335 and the swivel element 320.3 of the positive control 320 are shaped differently.
- the piston 235 does not have a tip at its front end, but rather a surface aligned vertically in the cross-ski direction with a round, concave indentation arranged in its middle, while the swivel element 320.3 does not have a horizontal, essentially V-shaped indentation at its rear end, but rather two rounded feet pointing laterally to the rear.
- both the shape of the front end of the piston 235 and the shape of the rear end of the pivot element 320.3 with or without feet pointing laterally to the rear can also be modified in order to optimize the course of the strength of the restoring force depending on the orientation of the pivot element 320.3 for a lateral safety release process.
- the pivot element 320.3 does not comprise an arm on each side. Accordingly, the second sliding guides 321.1, 321.2 on the pivot element 320.3 do not enclose the second sliding blocks 322.1, 322.2, but only support the second sliding blocks 322.1, 322.2 against movement towards the middle of the ski. This one-sided support is also provided for the first sliding guides 323.1, 323.2 and the first sliding blocks 324.1, 324.2.
- the side levers 320.1, 320.2 thus comprise a first sliding guide 323.1, 323.2 on their sides facing away from the middle of the ski.
- the first sliding guides 323.1, 323.2 of the front machine 301 shown here do not comprise hooks, but only one stop 319.1, 319.2 against which the first sliding blocks 324.1, 324.2 consisting of a mutual stop 318.1, 318.2 rest.
- the front automaton 301 shown here comprises two leg springs 329.1, 329.2 (see also Figure 26 ).
- leg springs 329.1, 329.2 are guided around one of the axes (not shown here) of the pivot levers 305.1, 305.2.
- the leg springs 329.1, 329.2 are each supported against the slide 320.4 and the corresponding pivot lever 305.1, 305.2 and press the upper part of this pivot lever 305.1, 305.2 outwards so that the two retaining spurs 306.1, 306.2 are each pressed apart as far as possible.
- the second sliding blocks 322.1, 322.2 which are arranged in the lower area of the pivot levers 305.1, 305.2, are pressed against the second sliding block guides 321.1, 321.2 arranged on the side levers 320.1, 320.2.
- leg springs 329.1, 329.2 are each additionally supported on the respective side lever 320.1, 320.2, whereby the side levers 320.1, 320.2 are pressed towards the middle of the ski.
- the first sliding blocks 324.1, 324.2 arranged on the side levers 320.1, 320.2 are also pressed against the first sliding block guides 323.1, 323.2 arranged on the pivot element 320.3. This allows the upper ends of the pivot levers 305.1, 305.2 to be moved as far apart as possible. At the same time, however, they can be pivoted towards the middle of the ski if necessary. This can be useful, for example, if there is no ski boot in the front machine 301.
- the two leg springs 329.1, 329.2 can only be supported on the carriage 320.4 and on the respective pivot lever 305.1, 305.2.
- the two leg springs 329.1, 329.2 can also be supported elsewhere and in a different way and can also be replaced by a different type of elastic element that can exert a tensile or compressive force.
- the respective pivot lever 305.1, 305.2 on each side can be pressed or pulled against the corresponding side lever 320.1, 320.2 by a first elastic element, while the respective side lever 320.1, 320.2 is pressed or pulled towards the middle of the ski by a second elastic element.
- the Figure 26 shows an enlarged section of the Figure 25 shown exploded view of the front automaton 301. It shows one of the two side levers 320.1 as well as the leg spring 329.1 belonging to the corresponding side. It can be seen that the leg spring 329.1 has a forward-pointing leg 328.1, which is supported on an upper side of the slide 320.4 when the front automaton 301 is assembled, and that the leg spring 329.2 has an upward-pointing leg 328.2, which is supported against the pivot lever 305.1 when the front automaton 301 is assembled.
- leg spring 329.1 has a downward-pointing leg 328.3 which, in the assembled state of the front automatic device 301, is inserted into an opening 327 in the side lever 320.1, whereby a movement of the side lever 320.1 both away from the center of the ski and towards the center of the ski can be controlled by the leg spring 329.1.
- the side lever 320.1 has an upper and a lower plate in a central area and an area facing the middle of the ski. Between these two plates there is a gap in which the second sliding block 322.1 is arranged.
- the pivoting element 320.3 is arranged at the same height as this gap and can be partially moved into this gap during a pivoting movement.
- the upper of the two plates extends slightly beyond the rest of the side lever 320.1 to the front and rear when viewed in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- This plate-like construction and this type of linear guide are used by both the side levers 320.1, 320.2 of the front machine 301 shown here and the side levers 220.1, 220.2 of the Figures 14a to 24c
- This design is only one possible example. It is The specialist is free to design the two side levers and their bearings in or on the slide 220.4 or 320.4 differently.
- the Figures 27a, 27b and 27c show a bottom view of the Figures 25 and 26 shown front machine 301, whereby the base plate 330 is hidden.
- the front automatic device 301 is in the holding position.
- the forced control 320 is in Figure 27a in the middle of the forced control path, while in the Figure 27b shown almost at one end of the forced control path.
- the front automaton 301 is located in the Figure 27c in the safety release position and one of the two pivot levers 305.1 is folded down.
- the side lever 320.1 which belongs to the pivot lever 305.1 folded down, is pushed towards the middle of the ski.
- the corresponding second sliding block 322.1 is in front of the pivot element 320.3 pivoted to the side and blocks a movement of the pivot element 320.1 back into a parallel alignment.
- the side lever 320.1 can therefore be pushed back by the leg spring 329.1 (see Figure 25 ) can be moved outwards away from the centre of the ski, thereby releasing the pivoting element 320.3. This allows the forced control 320 to be moved back to the centre of the forced control path.
- a lever can be arranged between the pivoting lever 305.1, 305.2 and the corresponding side lever 320.1, 320.2.
- the side lever 302.1, 302.2 of a pivoting lever 305.1, 305.2 that is folded downwards can be pulled outwards when the pivoting lever 305.1, 305.2 that is folded downwards is pivoted upwards by the skier.
- the levers can also be arranged loosely between the pivot levers 305.1, 305.2. It is sufficient if the levers only pull the corresponding side lever 320.1, 320.2 outwards when a pivot lever 305.1, 305.2 is pivoted upwards.
- the two side levers 320.1, 320.2 of the front automatic device 301 shown can also be designed differently.
- they can not be mounted in the carriage 320.4 so that they can move in the transverse direction of the ski, but can each be mounted on the carriage 320.4 so that they can pivot about a vertical axis. This enables the two side levers to act as a lever arm by increasing or reducing a force transmitted from the pivot levers 305.1, 305.2 to the pivot element 320.3.
- the side levers can each have a substantially elongated shape, for example, and each be aligned substantially in the longitudinal direction of the ski, with the vertical axis of each side lever being arranged in the region of a first end of the side lever. If the side levers also interact with the corresponding swivel lever in their middle area, viewed in their longitudinal direction, and interact with the swivel element in an area of their second end, a reduction in the force transmitted from the swivel levers to the swivel element is achieved. This reduces, for example, the frictional force between the side levers and the swivel element.
- Figure 28 shows an exploded view of another front machine 401 according to the invention from the perspective of an oblique view, in which "back” is at the bottom right of the figure, while “front” is at the top left.
- the Figure 28 The front machine 401 shown is constructed very similarly to the two front machines 201, 301, which are used in the Figures 14a to 24c or 25 to 27c. Accordingly, the functionality of the three front machines 201, 301, 401 is very similar.
- the front automaton 401 like the front automaton 301 described above, includes, among other things, a housing 402, a control lever 403, a piston 435 and a spiral spring 436. Furthermore, the front automaton 401 also includes a positive control 420 in addition to the two pivot levers 405.1, 405.2.
- the forced control 420 of the front machine 401 is constructed differently.
- the forced control 420 also includes a swivel element 420.3 and a slide 420.4.
- the forced control 320 of the front machine 301 does not include two side levers. Therefore, in the front machine 401, the two swivel levers 405.1, 405.2 work directly together with the swivel element 420.3.
- the two Pivoting levers 405.1, 405.2 of the front automatic device 401 have a stop 412.1, 412.2 pointing towards the middle of the ski below the axes 409.1, 409.2.
- the pivoting element 420.3 has a different shape than the previously described front automatic device 301 so that it can interact with the two stops 412.1, 412.2 of the pivoting levers 405.1, 405.2.
- the carriage 420.4 is also shaped differently than the carriage 320.4 of the previously described front automatic device 320.
- the pivoting element 420.3 is mounted in a middle area of the carriage 420.4 in a slot 420.5 running horizontally from a rear side to a front side of the carriage 420.4.
- one surface of the slide 420.4 has a recess 425.1, 425.2 on each side, from which the stops 412.1, 412.2 of the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 can be moved upwards when the corresponding pivot lever 405.1, 405.2 is tilted sideways in the event of a lateral safety release.
- the two side levers 405.1, 405.2 each have a cover 413.1, 413.2 at the height of the axes 409.1, 409.2.
- covers 413.1, 413.2 each extend slightly closer to the center of the ski than the stop 412.1, 412.2 of the corresponding pivot lever 405.1, 405.2 and fill the recesses 425.1, 425.2 in the surface of the slide 420.4 in the holding position and in the release position of the front automatic device 401.
- the upper areas of the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 are bent backwards so that the two retaining spurs 406.1, 406.2 are located behind the stops 412.1, 412.2 and the covers 413.1, 413.2. This ensures that the cover 413.1, 413.2 of the sideways pivoting lever 405.1, 405.1 can be pivoted upwards in front of the sole of the ski boot in the event of a lateral safety release.
- a second major difference between the front-loading machine 401 shown here and the one in the Figures 25 to 27c The advantage of the front machine 301 shown is that the front machine 401 comprises not only one but two base plates 430.1, 430.2 and a holding element 430.3. Of these three elements, a first base plate 430.1 as a guide for the movement of the carriage 420.4 in the transverse direction of the ski. In its front area in front of the guide for the carriage 420.4 it has two openings 431.1, 431.4 through which screws can be passed for fastening the front automatic device 401 to a SI ⁇ i. A second base plate 430.2 also has two openings 431.2, 431.3 in its front area through which screws can be passed for fastening the front automatic device 401 to a SI ⁇ i.
- This second base plate 430.2 is arranged behind the first base plate 430.1 and serves as a base for the holding element 430.3, which also has two openings 433 for fastening to a SI ⁇ i.
- This holding element 430.3 is formed from a piece of sheet metal. In a cross-section aligned vertically in the transverse direction of the ski, this holding element 430.3 has a substantially U-shape, with the two upper edges bent inwards. As a result, the holding element 430.3 forms a rail-like longitudinal guide for the housing 402 of the front automatic device 401, whereby the housing 402 of the front automatic device 401 cannot be moved upwards relative to the holding element 430.3.
- the front automatic device 401 when the front automatic device 401 is mounted on an SI ⁇ i, four screws are guided through four vertically aligned openings 432.1, 432.2, 432.3, 432.4 arranged in the housing 402 and screwed tightly to the SI ⁇ i.
- the two front screws run through the two front openings 432.1, 432.4 of the housing 402 as well as through the two openings 431.1, 431.4 of the first base plate 430.1 and hold the housing 402 and the first base plate 430.1 firmly on the ski.
- the two rear screws are guided downwards through the rear openings 432.2, 432.3 of the housing 402 when fastening the front automatic device 401, where they run through the two openings in the holding element 430.3 and through the two openings 431.2, 431.3 of the second base plate 430.2 and only hold the holding element 430.3 and the second base plate 430.2 to the SI ⁇ i. Therefore, in the assembled state, when the front automaton 401 is attached to a SI ⁇ i, the housing 402 is only screwed to the SI ⁇ i by the two front screws.
- the rear area of the housing 402 is held in the longitudinal guide of the holding element 430.3 screwed to the SI ⁇ i and can move in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the holding element 430.3.
- a third major difference between the front-loading machine 401 shown here and the Figures 14a to 24c or 25 to 27c is that the front automaton 401 has a damping position instead of a blocking position. Accordingly, the control lever 403 of the front automaton 401 shown here does not comprise a latch with which a movement of the carriage 420.4 in the transverse direction of the ski can be blocked. On the other hand, the control lever 403 comprises two curvatures 428.1, 428.2 which press from the front against a front side of the carriage 420.4 when the control lever 403 is moved upwards into a damping position. As a result, a movement of the carriage 420.4 in the transverse direction of the ski is subjected to increased resistance to movement due to friction.
- the carriage 420.4 can be moved less well in the transverse direction of the ski in the damping position of the front automaton 401. Therefore, if the damper position is used when climbing, the ski boot is prevented from swinging back and forth relative to the ski boot held in the front automatic device 401. Accordingly, the damper position increases the skier's sure-footedness. At the same time, however, a lateral safety release can still take place in the damper position, which ensures safety for the skier even in the damper position.
- FIGS. 29a, 29b and 29c each show a bottom view of a horizontally aligned cross section through the front machine 401, which runs through the pivoting element 420.3 and through the horizontal slot 420.5 in the carriage 420.4.
- the pivoting element 420.3 as with the two front machines 201, 301, is mounted on the carriage 420.4 so that it can pivot about a first vertical axis 448, wherein the first vertical axis 448 can be moved relative to the carriage 420.4 in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the pivoting element 420.3 is mounted behind the carriage 420.4 so that it can pivot about a second vertical axis 449 on the housing 402 of the front machine 401, wherein the second vertical axis 449 can be moved relative to the housing 402 in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the cross-sectional views show that the swivel element 420.3 has an elongated shape.
- a longitudinal axis of the pivot element 420.3 is aligned parallel to the longitudinal direction of the ski when the forced control 420 is in the middle of the forced control path.
- the pivot element 420.3 has two feet that protrude laterally from the longitudinal axis of the pivot element 420.3 and point diagonally backwards.
- the pivot element 420.3 is supported against a metal front side 437 of the piston 435.
- the support of the pivot element 420.3 against the piston 435 functions as in the case of the pivot element 43 of the Figures 12a, 12b and 12c shown variant of the front machine 1.
- the pivoting element 420.3 arranged slightly in front of the first vertical axis 448, has two arms 440.1, 440.2 that point slightly forward and protrude laterally from the longitudinal axis of the pivoting element 420.3. These two arms 440.1, 440.2 have outer ends that are rounded and are bent towards each other from the back to the front from the outside to the middle of the ski.
- the pivoting element 420.3 also comprises a head 441 arranged between its two arms 440.1, 440.2. This head 441 is arranged in front of the first vertical axis 448 and has a side that points forward and has a locking position. A flat area of this forward facing side is oriented substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pivot element 420.3.
- the control lever 403 presses against the head 441 of the pivot element 420.3.
- the leg element 420.3 is moved backwards in the release position compared to the holding position together with the piston 435 against the spring force of the spiral spring 436.
- the two arms 440.1, 440.2 of the pivot element 420.3 are also moved backwards relative to the stops 412.1, 412.2 of the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2. This means that the outer ends of the two arms 440.1, 440.2, which are bent towards each other towards the middle of the ski, give the stops 412.1, 412.2 more space for movement towards the middle of the ski compared to the holding position.
- the two pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 are each connected by a leg spring 429.1 429.2 with a This force causes the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 to be pivoted as far apart as possible in the release position and the two stops 412.1, 412.2 strike the outer ends of the two arms 440.1, 440.2. This ensures that the two retaining spurs are at the first distance from each other.
- the control lever 403 does not press against the head 441 of the swivel element 420.3. Accordingly, the swivel element 420.3 is moved forward in the holding position by the spiral spring 436 and the piston 435 as far as the bearing of the first vertical axis 448 in the slide 420.4 allows. In this position, the head 441 of the swivel element 420.3 is located just inside the front side of the slide 420.4.
- the two arms 440.1, 440.2 of the pivoting element 420.3 are also located so far forward in the slide 420.4 that the stops 412.1, 412.2 of the two pivoting levers 405.1, 405.2 in the rear area of the outer ends of the arms 440.1, 440.2 abut against the outer ends of the arms 440.1, 440.2. Since the outer ends of the two arms 440.1, 440.2 are furthest apart from each other in their rear area, the stops 412.1, 412.2 are also moved further apart compared to the release position. This means that the pivoting levers 405.1, 405.2 are pivoted together so that the two retaining spurs are at the second distance from each other.
- the front machine 401 is in the Figure 29c in the safety release position with a swivel lever 405.1 swung away to the side.
- the forced control 420 is moved to one end of the forced control path, whereby the swivel element 420.3 is swung about the first vertical axis 448 and about the second vertical axis 449 to the side of the swivel lever 405.1 released by the safety release. Due to this swivel movement, the arm 440.1 of the swivel element 420.3, against which the swiveled-away swivel lever 405.1 is supported in the holding position by its stop 412.1, is moved backwards.
- the stop 412.1 of the swiveled-away swivel lever is located 405.1 in front of the arm 440.1 of the pivoting element 405.1, viewed in the longitudinal direction of the ski. Since the pivoting lever 405.1 is thus released from the pivoting element 420.3, it is pivoted outwards by the leg spring 429.1 with the retaining spur, while its stop 412.1 is moved towards the middle of the ski. Because the stop 412.1 is therefore in front of the arm 440.1 of the pivoting element 420.3, the stop 412.1 prevents the arm 440.1 of the pivoting element 420.3 from being moved forward again. Accordingly, a movement of the forced control 420 back to the middle of the forced control path is blocked.
- this pivot lever 405.2 is not pivoted outwards with the retaining spur because the movement of the carriage 420.4 in the transverse direction of the ski moves the cover 413.2 of the corresponding pivot lever 405.2 below a central region of the housing 402 and abuts against the bottom of the housing 402.
- the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 can be pivoted against the spring force of the leg springs 429.1, 429.2 with the holding spurs towards the middle of the ski. If a ski with the front automatic device 401 falls over and hits a pivot lever 405.1, 405.2, the corresponding pivot lever 405.1, 405.2 can be pivoted inwards towards the middle of the ski, which reduces the risk of damage to the front automatic device 401.
- a vertically aligned cross-section of the front automaton 401 is shown, arranged in the middle of the ski and running in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the front automaton 401 is on the left, while the back automaton 401 is on the right.
- the front automaton 401 is in the release position. Accordingly, the control lever 403 is pivoted downwards with its free end about the ski transverse axis 407 and is in the release position. As a result, a locking unit 408 arranged below the ski transverse axis 407 on the control lever 403 and running concentrically about the ski transverse axis is moved backwards and presses the head 441 of the swivel element 420.3 backwards. A rear end of the locking unit 408 is locked in the locking position on the head 441 of the swivel element 420.3. This locking prevents the spiral spring 436 from pushing the piston 435 and the swivel element 420.3 forwards and moving the control lever 403 into its holding position.
- the control lever 403 In order to move the front automaton 401 from the release position to the holding position, the control lever 403 can be pulled upwards slightly. This is sufficient to release the locking unit 408 from the locking position on the head 441 of the swivel element 420.3. As soon as the locking unit 408 is released from the locking position, the locking unit 408 is moved forwards by the spiral spring 436 together with the swivel element 420.3 and the piston 435. This causes the control lever 403 to be pivoted upwards with its free end and transferred to the holding position. As a variant, the tread spur consisting of a base element 404.1 and a wire bracket 404.2 can also be pressed downwards to transfer the front automaton 401 to the holding position.
- the base element 404.1 of the tread is pivoted about the ski's transverse axis 407.
- the control lever 403 is moved by a stop 410 of the base element 404.1, which rests on a counterpart of the control lever 403. This also releases the locking unit 408 from the locking position on the head 441 of the pivoting element 420.3, after which the control lever 403 is moved into the holding position by the spiral spring 436 and the front automatic device 401 is moved into the holding position.
- the front automaton 401 is shown in the holding position. Therefore, the free end of the control lever 403 is located slightly higher than in the release position, while the locking unit 408 of the control lever 403 is located slightly further forward than in the release position. Accordingly, two locking positions 408.1 408.2 arranged one behind the other on a lower side of the locking unit 408 are located slightly further forward than in the release position. The front of the two locking positions 408.1 is pulled onto a front, upright edge of the first base plate 430.1 and locked into place on this front, upright edge of the first base plate 430.1. The control lever 403 is thus locked into its holding position.
- the base element 404.1 of the treadle is also pivoted about the ski transverse axis 407, so that the bracket element 404.2 of the treadle is lowered onto the housing 402 of the front automatic device 401.
- the front automaton 401 is shown in the damper position.
- the free end of the control lever 403 is therefore moved further upwards.
- the control lever 403 is pivoted further about the ski transverse axis 407, whereby the locking unit 408 of the control lever 403 is also moved further forwards and upwards.
- the rear of the two locking positions 408.2 is pulled onto the front, upright edge of the first base plate 430.1 and locked into place on this front, upright edge of the first base plate 430.1.
- the control lever 403 is therefore locked into its damper position.
- the stops 412.1, 412.2 on the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 can also be designed differently.
- the function of the stops 412.1, 412.2 can also be taken over by another element.
- a roller can be provided for each pivot lever 405.1, 405.2, which is mounted on the corresponding pivot lever 405.1, 405.2 so that it can rotate about an axis.
- These rollers can be arranged, for example, such that their axes are aligned essentially vertically in the release position and in the holding position and that the rollers can roll on the outer ends of the arms 440.1, 440.2 of the pivot element 420.3.
- the rollers instead of the stops 412.1, 412.2 can be regarded as the first sliding blocks, while the outer ends of the arms 440.1, 440.2 of the pivoting element 420.3 can be regarded as the first sliding block guides.
- Figure 31 shows an exploded view of another front machine 501 according to the invention from the perspective of an oblique view, in which "back” is at the bottom right of the figure, while “front” is at the top left. To improve the clarity of the illustration, not all elements of the front machine 501 are shown, but only those elements that are most important for understanding.
- a first significant difference between the front machine 501 shown here and the front machine 401, which is in the Figures 28 to 30c shown is the Function of the interaction of the pivot levers 505.1, 505.2 with the pivot element 520.3.
- the two pivot levers 505.1, 505.2 are pivotably mounted on a carriage 520.4 in a central area about axes (not shown) that are aligned essentially in the longitudinal direction of the ski. Below the mounting of these axes on the pivot levers 505.1, 505.2, however, the pivot levers 505.1, 505.2 do not include any stops pointing towards the middle of the ski, but instead each include a pivot arm 517.1, 517.2 pointing towards the middle of the ski.
- pivot arms 517.1, 517.2 each have an elongated shape and are each mounted in the area of a lower end of the corresponding pivot lever 505.1, 505.2 on the corresponding pivot lever 505.1, 505.2 so as to be pivotable about an axis (not shown) that is aligned essentially in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- these two pivot arms 517.1, 517.2 point essentially horizontally to the center of the ski and interact with the pivot element 520.3 with a free end that is opposite the bearing on the respective pivot lever 505.1, 505.2.
- the swivel element 520.3 allows a swivel arm 517.1, 517.2 more space towards the center of the ski
- the corresponding swivel lever 505.1, 505.2 is swiveled outwards by a leg spring (not shown here), so that the corresponding retaining spur 506.1, 506.2 is moved outwards away from the center of the ski and the corresponding swivel arm 517.1, 517.2 is moved inwards towards the center of the ski.
- the pivoting element 520.3 in contrast to the pivoting element 420.3 of the front automaton 401, does not have a head against which the control lever 503 could press in order to push the pivoting element 520.3 backwards.
- the pivoting element 520.3 of the front automaton 501 shown here is also pivotably mounted on the carriage 520.4 about a first vertical axis 548. This first vertical axis 548 is also also mounted on the carriage 520.4 so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- this first vertical axis 548 has a rectangular, elongated element 550 at its upper end, which is aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski and is mounted on the carriage 520.4 so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- This rectangular element 550 extends with its front end into an area of a front end of the carriage 520.4. Therefore, when the control lever 503 is pivoted downwards with its free end and the locking unit 508 of the control lever 503 is thereby moved backwards, the locking unit 508 does not press a head of the pivot element 520.3, but rather the front end of the rectangular element 550 backwards. As a result, the rectangular element 550 is moved backwards together with the first vertical axis 548, which also moves the pivot element 520.3 backwards.
- the swivel arms 517.1, 517.2 on the swivel levers 505.1, 505.2 of the front automatic device 501 shown can also be designed differently.
- the swivel arms 517.1, 517.2 can be shaped differently. However, they can also have a roller at their free ends, which is mounted on the corresponding swivel arm 517.1, 517.2 so that it can rotate about an axis.
- These rollers can be arranged, for example, such that their axes are aligned vertically when the swivel arms 517.1, 517.2 are aligned horizontally. This means that the rollers can roll on the outer side edges of the swivel element 520.3.
- the rollers instead of the free ends of the pivot arms 517.1, 517.2 can be regarded as the first sliding blocks, while the outer side edges of the pivot element 520.3 can be regarded as the first sliding block guides.
- the invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments of the front automaton 1 and the four other front automatons 201, 301, 401 and 501.
- Various other designs are possible.
- features of the front automatons 1, 201, 301, 401 and 501 can be combined as desired.
- the front automatons 401, 501 can have a blocking position instead of the damper position or neither a damper position nor a blocking position.
- the front automatons 1, 201 and 301 can also have a blocking position instead of the damper position. have a damper position instead of the blocking position or have neither a damper position nor a blocking position.
- both the first and the second guide rails can be replaced by other guides.
- One possibility is to use dovetail guides with a carriage guided on them.
- the first guide rails can be arranged not on the positive control but on the housing of the front machine.
- the two axes can be arranged on the positive control instead of the housing.
- the bearings of the two pivot levers on the positive control can also be arranged below the axes about which the pivot levers can pivot.
- the pivoting away of the pivot lever in the direction of movement can be achieved by arranging a guide for the pivot lever on the housing of the front automat, which releases the corresponding pivot lever as soon as the end of the forced control path is reached.
- the forced control hits an obstacle at the end of the forced control path, whereby a release mechanism on the forced control is actuated, which releases the corresponding lever for a pivoting movement.
- the invention is not limited to these variants of the front vending machine. Other embodiments are also possible.
Landscapes
- Footwear And Its Accessory, Manufacturing Method And Apparatuses (AREA)
- Basic Packing Technique (AREA)
Description
Die Erfindung betrifft einen Frontautomat für eine Tourenskibindung. Dieser Frontautomat umfasst zwei in Skilängsrichtung gesehen seitlich angeordnete, sich gegenüber liegende Hebel mit je einem Haltemittel zum Halten eines Skischuhs in einem Zehenbereich des Skischuhs. Die beiden Hebel sind je derart um eine Achse schwenkbar gelagert, dass die Haltemittel bei einer Schwenkbewegung der Hebel um diese Achsen in eine Skiquerrichtung bewegt werden. Der Frontautomat weist eine Freigabestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. Zudem weist er eine Festhaltestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden, welcher kleiner als der erste Abstand ist.The invention relates to a front automaton for a touring ski binding. This front automaton comprises two levers arranged laterally and opposite one another as seen in the longitudinal direction of the ski, each with a holding means for holding a ski boot in a toe area of the ski boot. The two levers are each mounted so as to be pivotable about an axis such that the holding means are moved in a transverse direction of the ski when the levers pivot about these axes. The front automaton has a release position in which the two holding means are at a first distance from one another. It also has a locking position in which the two holding means are at a second distance from one another, which is smaller than the first distance.
Hinsichtlich ihrer Funktion sind Skibindungen unterteilbar in Pistenbindungen, die nur zum Abfahren und Skifahren an Skiliften verwendet werden, und Tourenbindungen, die zusätzlich auch zum Gehen auf Skiern, insbesondere zum Aufsteigen mit Hilfe von an den Skiern befestigten Steigfellen, verwendet werden. Während Erstere bloss eine zuverlässige Fixierung des Skischuhs auf dem SI<i in einer sogenannten Abfahrtsstellung zu gewährleisten haben, müssen Letztere zum Aufsteigen zusätzlich von der Abfahrtsstellung in eine Aufstiegsstellung gebracht werden können, in welcher der Skischuh um eine Achse in Skiquerrichtung verschwenkbar im Fersenbereich vom SI<i abhebbar ist, um zum Gehen eine Gelenkbewegung zwischen dem Skischuh und dem SI<i zu ermöglichen.In terms of their function, ski bindings can be divided into piste bindings, which are only used for downhill skiing and skiing on ski lifts, and touring bindings, which are also used for walking on skis, in particular for climbing with the help of climbing skins attached to the skis. While the former only have to ensure reliable fixation of the ski boot on the ski in a so-called downhill position, the latter must also be able to be moved from the downhill position into an ascent position for climbing, in which the ski boot can be pivoted about an axis in the transverse direction of the ski and lifted off the ski at the heel in order to enable a joint movement between the ski boot and the ski for walking.
Tourenskibindungen wiederum sind in zwei Typen unterteilbar. Der eine Typ umfasst einen gegenüber dem SI<i verschwenkbaren Skischuhträger, an welchem der Skischuh durch Bindungsbacken gehalten ist. Ein repräsentatives Mitglied dieses Typs von Tourenskibindungen ist beispielsweise in der
Für die Beschreibung von derartigen Bindungssystemen wird als Referenzsystem oft ein (fiktiver) SI<i verwendet, wobei angenommen wird, dass die Bindung auf diesem SI<i montiert sei. Diese Gewohnheit wird im vorliegenden Text übernommen. So bedeutet der Begriff "Skilängsrichtung" entlang der Ausrichtung der Längsachse des Skis. Ähnlich bedeutet "skiparallel" für ein längliches Objekt entlang der Längsachse des Skis ausgerichtet. Für ein flächiges Objekt hingegen bedeutet der Begriff "skiparallel" parallel zur Gleitfläche des Skis ausgerichtet. Weiter ist mit dem Begriff "Skiquerrichtung" eine Richtung quer zur Skilängsrichtung gemeint, welche aber nicht genau rechtwinklig zur Längsachse des Skis orientiert sein muss. Ihre Ausrichtung kann auch etwas von einem rechten Winkel abweichen. Der Begriff "Skimitte" wiederum bedeutet in Skiquerrichtung gesehen eine Mitte des Skis, während der Begriff "skifest" nicht beweglich gegenüber dem SI<i bedeutet. Zudem ist zu beachten, dass auch Begriffe, welche das Wort "Ski" nicht enthalten, auf das Referenzsystem des (fiktiven) Skis Bezug nehmen. So beziehen sich die Begriffe "vorne", "hinten", "oben", "unten" sowie "seitlich" auf "vorne", "hinten", "oben", "unten" sowie "seitlich" des Skis. Genauso beziehen sich auch Begriffe wie "horizontal" und "vertikal" auf den Ski, wobei "horizontal" in einer sl<iparallelen Ebene liegend und "vertikal" senkrecht zu dieser Ebene ausgerichtet bedeutet.To describe such binding systems, a (fictitious) SI<i is often used as a reference system, assuming that the binding is mounted on this SI<i. This practice is adopted in the present text. The term "longitudinal direction of the ski" means along the alignment of the longitudinal axis of the ski. Similarly, "ski parallel" for an elongated object means aligned along the longitudinal axis of the ski. For a flat object, however, the term "ski parallel" means aligned parallel to the gliding surface of the ski. Furthermore, the term "cross direction of the ski" means a direction transverse to the longitudinal direction of the ski, which does not have to be oriented exactly at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the ski. Its alignment can also deviate slightly from a right angle. The term "ski center" in turn means a center of the ski seen in the cross direction of the ski, while the term "ski fixed" means not movable relative to the SI<i. It should also be noted that terms that do not contain the word "ski" also refer to the reference system of the (fictitious) ski. The terms "front", "back", "top", "bottom" and "side" refer to the "front", "back", "top", "bottom" and "side" of the ski. In the same way, terms such as "horizontal" and "vertical" refer to the ski, where "horizontal" means lying in a plane parallel to the ski and "vertical" means oriented perpendicular to this plane.
Eine Tourenskibindung des oben eingeführten, zweiten Typs ist in der
Um das Bindungsfrontteil von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung und zurück zu bringen, umfasst das in der
Bei einem Sturz kann der Skischuh auch ohne Betätigung des Öffnungshebels aus dem Skibindungssystem gelöst werden. Dazu wird der Skischuh zuerst aus dem Fersenautomat und danach aus dem Bindungsfrontteil gelöst. Falls es sich um einen frontalen Sturz handelt, so wird der Skischuh vom Fersenautomaten nach oben freigegeben und im Bindungsfrontteil nach vorne gekippt. Wenn die nach vorne oder nach oben wirkende Kraft auf den Skischuh genügend gross ist, so wird der Skischuh auch aus dem Bindungsfrontteil gerissen, indem die auf die beiden Winl<elhebel wirkende Kraft überwunden wird. Falls es sich hingegen um einen seitlichen Sturz handelt, wird der Skischuh vom Fersenautomat in seitliche Richtung freigegeben und um eine im Zehenbereich des Skischuhs liegende Vertil<alachse gedreht. Dabei wird der Skischuh drehend aus dem Bindungsfrontteil gelöst, indem die auf die Winl<elhebel wirkende Kraft überwunden wird.In the event of a fall, the ski boot can be released from the ski binding system without using the release lever. To do this, the ski boot is first released from the heel mechanism and then from the front part of the binding. In the event of a frontal fall, the ski boot is released upwards by the heel mechanism and tilted forwards in the front part of the binding. If the force acting forwards or upwards on the ski boot is sufficiently large, the ski boot is also torn from the front part of the binding by overcoming the force acting on the two angle levers. In the event of a sideways fall, the ski boot is released sideways by the heel mechanism and tilted forwards by a force located in the toe area of the ski boot. The ski boot is released from the front part of the binding by rotating, overcoming the force acting on the angle levers.
Aufgrund dieser Lösungsmöglichkeit des Bindungsfrontteils besteht das Problem, dass sich in der Aufstiegsstellung der Skischuh durch ein seitliches Drehmoment unbeabsichtigt aus dem Bindungsfrontteil lösen kann und damit gänzlich vom SI<i gelöst wird. Eine solche unbeabsichtigte Auslösung kann gemäss der
Eine Weiterentwicklung des Bindungsfrontteils gemäss der
Sowohl das Bindungsfrontteil gemäss der
Einen etwas anderen Ansatz wird beim Frontautomaten, welcher in der
Zusätzlich zur Verschiebbarkeit in Skilängsrichtung ist der Schwenkhebel um eine vertikale Achse schwenkbar am Frontautomaten gelagert, wobei er aber von zwei Federn in eine sl<iparallele Ausrichtung gedrückt wird. Bei einer seitlich auf den Skischuh wirkenden Kraft kann daher der äussere der beiden Winkelhebel nach aussen gedrückt werden, indem der Schwenkhebel gegen die Federkraft etwas seitlich geschwenkt wird, bis der Winkelhebel vom seitlichen Einschnitt im Schwenkhebel freigegeben wird. Gleichzeitig wird der innere Winkelhebel durch die Schwenkbewegung des Schwenkhebels dem äusseren Winl<elhebel folgend etwas nach innen geschwenkt. Dadurch ermöglicht der Frontautomat gemäss der
Auch beim Frontautomaten gemäss der
Der Nachteil dieser bekannten Bindungsfrontteile und Frontautomaten ist, dass sie für den Skifahrer nur eine beschränkte Sicherheit bieten. Wie bereits erwähnt, bieten die beiden Bindungsfrontteile gemäss der
Aufgabe der Erfindung ist es, einen dem eingangs genannten technischen Gebiet zugehörenden Frontautomaten zu schaffen, welcher die Sicherheit für einen Skiläufer erhöht.The object of the invention is to create a front automatic device belonging to the technical field mentioned at the beginning, which increases the safety for a skier.
Die Lösung der Aufgabe ist durch die Merkmale des Anspruchs 1 definiert. Gemäss der Erfindung sind die Haltemittel Stifte sind, welche derart am jeweiligen Hebel angeordnet sind, dass sie ausgehend vom jeweiligen Hebel mit einem freien Ende zur Skimitte zeigen. Zudem weist der Frontautomat eine Sicherheitsauslösestellung auf. Weiter umfasst der Frontautomat eine Zwangssteuerung, an welcher die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung gelagert sind, sodass die beiden Hebel innerhalb eines dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar sind und dabei die beiden Haltemittel gekoppelt im zweiten Abstand zueinander auf einem dynamischen Weg in Skiquerrichtung bewegt werden, womit ein im Frontautomaten gehaltener Skischuh zusammen mit den beiden Haltemitteln in der Festhaltestellung auf dem dynamischen Weg in Skiquerrichtung bewegt werden kann, wodurch vom Frontautomaten Energie aufgenommen werden kann, ohne dass der Skischuh aus dem Frontautomaten gelöst wird. Dabei kann es sich bei der gekoppelten Bewegung der beiden Hebel entlang des dynamischen Bereichs beispielsweise um eine Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel um die Achsen handeln. Es kann sich bei der gekoppelten Bewegung der beiden Hebel entlang des dynamischen Bereichs beispielsweise aber auch um eine lineare Bewegung entlang eines linearen Wegs handeln, welche einer Translationsbewegung der beiden Hebel entspricht, bei welcher die beiden Hebel gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung verschoben werden. Es kann sich bei der gekoppelten Bewegung der beiden Hebel entlang des dynamischen Bereichs beispielsweise aber auch um eine lineare Bewegung entlang eines linearen Wegs handeln, welche einer Kombination einer Translationsbewegung und einer Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel entspricht, bei welcher die beiden Hebel gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung verschoben und um die Achsen geschwenkt werden.The solution to the problem is defined by the features of
Der dynamische Bereich kann auf einer oder auf beiden Seiten durch einen Anschlag begrenzt sein, durch welchen wenigstens einer der beiden Hebel gestoppt und in seiner weiteren Bewegungsfreiheit gehindert wird. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass der dynamische Bereich auf einer oder auf beiden Seiten dadurch begrenzt ist, dass die beiden Hebel ab einer bestimmten Position nicht mehr gekoppelt, sondern entkoppelt bewegbar sind. Selbstverständlich besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass der dynamische Bereich für einen der Hebel durch einen Anschlag begrenzt ist und für den anderen der Hebel dadurch begrenzt ist, dass er ab einer bestimmten Position entkoppelt bewegbar ist. Dabei kann die Begrenzungsart für die beiden Hebel auch abhängig von der Seite des dynamischen Bereichs sein. Das bedeutet, dass beispielsweise der dynamische Bereich auf einer ersten Seite für einen ersten der beiden Hebel durch einen Anschlag begrenzt ist und für einen zweiten der beiden Hebel dadurch begrenzt ist, dass er ab einer bestimmten Position entkoppelt bewegbar ist. Gleichzeitig kann der dynamische Bereich auf einer zweiten Seite für den ersten Hebel dadurch begrenzt sein, dass er ab einer bestimmten Position entkoppelt bewegbar ist, während der dynamische Bereich auf der zweiten Seite für den zweiten Hebel durch einen Anschlag begrenzt ist.The dynamic range can be limited on one or both sides by a stop, which stops at least one of the two levers and prevents it from moving further. However, it is also possible for the dynamic range to be limited on one or both sides by the fact that from a certain position the two levers can no longer be moved coupled, but can be moved decoupledly. Of course, it is also possible for the dynamic range for one of the levers to be limited by a stop and for the other lever to be limited by the fact that from a certain position it can be moved decoupledly. The type of limitation for the two levers can also depend on the side of the dynamic range. This means that, for example, the dynamic range on a first side is limited by a stop for a first of the two levers and for a second of the two levers it is limited by the fact that from a certain position it can be moved decoupledly. At the same time, the dynamic range on a second side for the first lever can be limited by the fact that it can be moved in a decoupled manner from a certain position, while the dynamic range on the second side for the second lever is limited by a stop.
Erfindungsgemäss kann ein im Frontautomaten gehaltener Skischuh zusammen mit den beiden Haltemitteln in der Festhaltestellung auf dem dynamischen Weg in Skiquerrichtung bewegt werden kann, wodurch vom Frontautomaten Energie aufgenommen werden kann, ohne dass der Skischuh aus dem Frontautomaten gelöst wird. Dies ist beim SI<ilaufen und gegebenenfalls bei einem Sturz vorteilhaft, da Schläge auf den SI<i oder den Skischuh entstehen können, bei welchen sich der Skischuh nicht vom Frontautomaten lösen sollte. Um eine Stärke der aushaltbaren Schläge einzustellen, kann dabei die vom Frontautomaten aufnehmbare Energie vorgegeben werden, indem die Länge des dynamischen Wegs und/oder eine Widerstandskraft, welche für die Bewegung aufgebracht werden muss, angepasst werden. Entsprechend kann eine kontrollierte Sicherheitsauslösung vorgesehen werden, welche ausgelöst wird, wenn die Energie eines Schlages die aufnehmbare Energie überschreiten sollte.According to the invention, a ski boot held in the front automatic device can be moved along the dynamic path in the transverse direction of the ski together with the two holding means in the holding position, whereby the front automatic device can absorb energy without the ski boot being released from the front automatic device. This is advantageous when skiing and possibly in the event of a fall, as impacts can occur on the ski boot or the ski boot, which should not cause the ski boot to be released from the front automatic device. In order to set the strength of the impacts that can be withstood, the energy that the front automatic device can absorb can be specified by adjusting the length of the dynamic path and/or a resistance force that must be applied for the movement. Accordingly, a controlled A safety release should be provided which is triggered if the energy of a blow exceeds the absorbable energy.
In einer ersten, bevorzugten Variante sind in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung um die Achsen schwenkbar. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die Bewegung der beiden Hebel durch die Achsen geführt ist.In a first, preferred variant, in the holding position, the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range and can be pivoted around the axes in the transverse direction of the ski. This has the advantage that the movement of the two levers is guided by the axes.
In einer zweiten, bevorzugten Variante dazu sind die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung entlang eines linearen Wegs bewegbar. Dabei kann es sich beispielsweise um eine Translationsbewegung der beiden Hebel handeln, bei welcher die beiden Hebel gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung verschoben werden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass in der Festhaltestellung eine stabile Verbindung zwischen den beiden Hebeln vorgegeben werden kann, welche die beiden Haltemittel an den Hebeln im zweiten Abstand zueinander hält. Es kann sich bei der Bewegung der beiden Hebel entlang des linearen Wegs aber beispielsweise auch um eine Kombination einer Translationsbewegung und einer Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel handeln, bei welcher die beiden Hebel gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung verschoben und um die Achsen geschwenkt werden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass ein Verlauf des dynamischen Wegs der Haltemittel derart ausgebildet werden kann, dass Kräfte, welche aus verschiedenen Richtungen auf einen im Frontautomaten gehaltener Skischuh wirken, vom Frontautomaten optimal aufgenommen werden können.In a second, preferred variant, the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range and can be moved along a linear path in the transverse direction of the ski. This can, for example, be a translational movement of the two levers, in which the two levers are coupled and moved in the transverse direction of the ski. This has the advantage that in the holding position a stable connection can be specified between the two levers, which holds the two holding means on the levers at a second distance from each other. The movement of the two levers along the linear path can, for example, also be a combination of a translational movement and a pivoting movement of the two levers, in which the two levers are coupled and moved in the transverse direction of the ski and pivoted about the axes. This has the advantage that the dynamic path of the holding means can be designed in such a way that forces acting from different directions on a ski boot held in the front automatic device can be optimally absorbed by the front automatic device.
In einer bevorzugten Ausführungsform umfasst der Frontautomat für eine Skibindung, insbesondere eine Tourenskibindung, zwei in Skilängsrichtung gesehen seitlich angeordnete, sich gegenüberliegende Hebel mit je einem Haltemittel zum Halten eines Skischuhs in einem Zehenbereich des Skischuhs. Dabei sind die beiden Hebel vorzugsweise je um eine Achse schwenkbar gelagert und die Haltemittel werden von den Hebeln bei einer Schwenkbewegung in eine Skiquerrichtung bewegt, wobei der Frontautomat vorzugsweise ein als Zwangssteuerung bezeichnetes Element umfasst und die beiden Hebel an dieser Zwangssteuerung sowie an einem anderen Element des Frontautomaten lagerbar sind. Vorzugsweise weist der Frontautomat eine Freigabestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. Weiter weist der Frontautomat bevorzugt eine Festhaltestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden, welcher kleiner als der erste Abstand ist. Vorteilhafterweise sind dabei in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel beweglich an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert, welche in der Festhaltestellung ebenfalls beweglich ist. Dabei sind die beiden Hebel vorzugsweise durch die bewegliche Zwangssteuerung innerhalb eines dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung schwenkbar, wobei die beiden Haltemittel gekoppelt im zweiten Abstand zueinander auf einem dynamischen Weg in Skiquerrichtung bewegt werden. Wie die Zwangssteuerung dabei bewegt wird, ist nicht vorgegeben. Es kann sich beispielsweise um eine lineare Bewegung oder um eine Schwenk- oder Drehbewegung handeln.In a preferred embodiment, the front automaton for a ski binding, in particular a touring ski binding, comprises two levers arranged laterally opposite one another as seen in the longitudinal direction of the ski, each with a holding means for holding a ski boot in a toe area of the ski boot. The two levers are preferably each mounted so as to be pivotable about an axis and the holding means are moved by the levers during a pivoting movement in a transverse direction of the ski, the front automaton preferably comprising an element referred to as a positive control and the two levers being mountable on this positive control and on another element of the front automaton. The front automaton preferably has a release position in which the two holding means are at a first distance from one another. Furthermore, the front automaton preferably has a holding position in which the two holding means are at a second distance from each other, which is smaller than the first distance. Advantageously, in the holding position, the two levers are movably mounted on the forced control, which is also movable in the holding position. The two levers are preferably coupled by the movable forced control within a dynamic range and can be pivoted in the transverse direction of the ski, with the two holding means coupled at the second distance from each other being moved along a dynamic path in the transverse direction of the ski. How the forced control is moved is not predetermined. It can be a linear movement or a pivoting or rotating movement, for example.
In einer weiteren, bevorzugten Ausführungsform umfasst der Frontautomat für eine Skibindung, insbesondere eine Tourenskibindung, zwei in Skilängsrichtung gesehen seitlich angeordnete, sich gegenüberliegende Hebel mit je einem Haltemittel zum Halten eines Skischuhs in einem Zehenbereich des Skischuhs. Dabei sind die beiden Hebel vorzugsweise je um eine Achse schwenkbar gelagert und die Haltemittel werden von den Hebeln bei einer Schwenkbewegung in eine Skiquerrichtung bewegt, wobei der Frontautomat vorzugsweise ein als Zwangssteuerung bezeichnetes Element umfasst und die Achsen an dieser Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind. Vorzugsweise weist der Frontautomat eine Freigabestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. Weiter weist der Frontautomat bevorzugt eine Festhaltestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden, welcher kleiner als der erste Abstand ist. Vorteilhafterweise sind dabei die beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert, welche in der Festhaltestellung beweglich ist. Dabei sind die beiden Hebel vorzugsweise durch die bewegliche Zwangssteuerung innerhalb eines dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar, wobei die beiden Haltemittel gekoppelt im zweiten Abstand zueinander auf einem dynamischen Weg in Skiquerrichtung bewegt werden. Wie die Zwangssteuerung dabei bewegt wird, ist nicht vorgegeben. Es kann sich beispielsweise um eine lineare Bewegung oder um eine Schwenk- oder Drehbewegung handeln.In a further preferred embodiment, the front automaton for a ski binding, in particular a touring ski binding, comprises two levers arranged laterally opposite one another as seen in the longitudinal direction of the ski, each with a holding means for holding a ski boot in a toe area of the ski boot. The two levers are preferably each pivotably mounted about an axis and the holding means are moved by the levers during a pivoting movement in a transverse direction of the ski, the front automaton preferably comprising an element referred to as a positive control and the axes being mounted on this positive control. The front automaton preferably has a release position in which the two holding means are at a first distance from one another. The front automaton also preferably has a holding position in which the two holding means are at a second distance from one another, which is smaller than the first distance. The two levers are advantageously mounted on the positive control, which is movable in the holding position. The two levers are preferably coupled by the movable forced control within a dynamic range and can be moved in the transverse direction of the ski, with the two holding means coupled at a second distance from each other and moved along a dynamic path in the transverse direction of the ski. How the forced control is moved is not predetermined. It can be a linear movement or a swivel or rotary movement, for example.
Bevorzugte Ausführungsformen des Frontautomaten können aber auch andersartig ausgebildet sein. Im Folgenden wird anhand von vorteilhaften Merkmalen gezeigt, wie solche andere bevorzugte Ausführungsformen ausgebildet sein können. Selbstverständlich können aber auch die beiden oben genannten, bevorzugten Ausführungsformen eines oder mehrere dieser vorteilhaften Merkmale umfassen.However, preferred embodiments of the front-loading machine can also be designed differently. The following shows how such other preferred embodiments can be designed using advantageous features. Of course, the two preferred embodiments mentioned above can also include one or more of these advantageous features.
Vorteilhafterweise sind die Achsen der Hebel in einer sl<iparallelen Ebene angeordnet. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die Achsen unterhalb der Haltemittel angeordnet werden können, wodurch eine kompakte Bauweise des Frontautomaten erreicht wird. Bevorzugt sind die Achsen zudem im Wesentlichen skiparallel ausgerichtet, wobei aber Abweichungen von einer sl<iparallelen Ausrichtung von 10 Grad oder von 20 Grad vorgesehen sein können. Vorzugsweise ist jedoch die seitliche Abweichung der Achsen von einer sl<iparallelen Ausrichtung weniger als 10 Grad. Falls die Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs schwenkbar sind und entsprechend der dynamische Weg der Haltemittel in einer Ebene senkrecht zur Achse des jeweiligen Hebels liegt, ist dadurch eine Ebene der dynamischen Wege der Haltemittel im Wesentlichen in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtet. Falls hingegen die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung entlang eines linearen Wegs bewegbar sind, kann durch die Ausrichtung der Achsen bei einer Schwenkbewegung der Hebel um die Achsen eine Fortführung der Bewegung der Haltemittel in Skiquerrichtung erreicht werden. In beiden Fällen ist diese Anordnung der Achsen vorteilhaft für den Fall, dass der Frontautomat eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung vorsieht. Bei einer solchen seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung verläuft eine Bewegung des Skischuhs im Wesentlichen in einer sl<iparallelen Ebene. Dabei kann die Bewegung des Skischuhs sowohl eine lineare Bewegung als auch eine Drehung um eine vertikale Achse des Skischuhs umfassen. Da die Ebene des dynamischen Wegs somit im Wesentlichen rechtwinklig zur Bewegungsebene des Skischuhs ausgerichtet ist, kann der dynamische Weg der Haltemittel bestmöglich Bewegungen des Skischuhs aufnehmen, welche durch verschieden ausgerichtete, in Skiquerrichtung verlaufende Krafteinwirkungen verursacht werden. Entsprechend ist für verschiedene Krafteinwirkungen die vom Frontautomaten aufnehmbare Energie bestmöglich vorgebbar. Durch Vorgabe der aufnehmbaren Energie kann wiederum eine kontrollierte, seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung ermöglicht werden, welche bei einer Überschreitung der aufnehmbaren Energie eintritt.The axes of the levers are advantageously arranged in a plane parallel to the skis. This has the advantage that the axes can be arranged below the holding means, thereby achieving a compact design of the front automatic device. The axes are also preferably aligned essentially parallel to the skis, although deviations from a parallel alignment of 10 degrees or 20 degrees can be provided. Preferably, however, the lateral deviation of the axes from a parallel alignment is less than 10 degrees. If the levers can be pivoted within the dynamic range and the dynamic path of the holding means lies in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the respective lever, one plane of the dynamic paths of the holding means is aligned essentially in the transverse direction of the skis. If, on the other hand, the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range and can be moved in the transverse direction of the skis along a linear path, the alignment of the axes can result in a continuation of the movement of the holding means in the transverse direction of the skis when the levers are pivoted about the axes. In both cases, this arrangement of the axes is advantageous if the front automatic device provides a lateral safety release. With such a lateral safety release, the ski boot moves essentially in a plane parallel to the ski boot. The movement of the ski boot can include both a linear movement and a rotation about a vertical axis of the ski boot. Since the plane of the dynamic path is thus essentially aligned at right angles to the plane of movement of the ski boot, the dynamic path of the holding means can best absorb movements of the ski boot caused by differently oriented forces running across the ski. Accordingly, the energy that the front automatic device can absorb can be specified as best as possible for different forces. By specifying the absorbable energy, a controlled, lateral safety release can be enabled, which occurs when the absorbable energy is exceeded.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Achsen anders ausgerichtet sind. Beispielsweise können sie auch vertikal oder in einem beliebigen Winkel zur Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet sein.Alternatively, the axes can be aligned differently. For example, they can be aligned vertically or at any angle to the longitudinal direction of the ski.
Vorteilhafterweise umfassen beide Hebel je auf einer der Skimitte zugewandten Seite eine Steuerbacl<e zum Zusammenwirken mit einem Skischuh. Bei diesen Steuerbacl<en kann es sich beispielsweise je um ein am entsprechenden Hebel angebrachtes, zur Skimitte hervorstehendes Element handeln. Die Steuerbacl<en haben den Vorteil, dass bei einer Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel ab einem gewissen Schwenkwinkel die Steuerbacl<e des in Bewegungsrichtung liegenden Hebels mit dem Skischuh zusammenwirken kann und dadurch das Haltemittel dieses Hebels vom Skischuh gelöst werden kann. Entsprechend hat dies den Vorteil, dass der Vorgang einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung aus dem Frontautomaten vereinfacht werden kann. Das bedeutet, dass, falls der Frontautomat eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung vorsieht, der Bewegungsablauf des Skischuhs bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung kontinuierlicher wird und damit die Sicherheit für den Skiläufer erhöht wird. Falls die Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs um die Achsen schwenkbar sind, können dabei die Steuerbacl<en bei einer Schwenkbewegung der Hebel bereits innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs mit dem Skischuh zusammenwirken. Falls hingegen die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs entlang eines linearen Wegs bewegbar sind und beispielsweise wenigstens einer der beiden Hebel bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung um die entsprechende Achse schwenkbar ist, so kann der entsprechende Steuerbacl<en bei der Sicherheitsauslösung mit dem Skischuh zusammenwirken, wodurch der Skischuh einfacher aus dem Frontautomaten gelöst werden kann.Advantageously, both levers comprise a control bar for interacting with a ski boot on a side facing the middle of the ski. These control bars can, for example, be an element attached to the corresponding lever and protruding towards the middle of the ski. The control bars have the advantage that when the two levers are pivoted above a certain pivot angle, the control bar of the lever in the direction of movement can interact with the ski boot and the holding means of this lever can therefore be released from the ski boot. This has the advantage that the process of a lateral safety release from the front automatic device can be simplified. This means that if the front automatic device provides a lateral safety release, the movement sequence of the ski boot becomes more continuous when the safety is released from the side and this increases safety for the skier. If the levers can pivot about the axes within the dynamic range, the control bars can interact with the ski boot when the levers are pivoted within the dynamic range. If, however, the two levers are movable along a linear path within the dynamic range and, for example, at least one of the two levers can pivot about the corresponding axis in the event of a lateral safety release, the corresponding control arm can interact with the ski boot in the event of the safety release, whereby the ski boot can be released more easily from the front automatic device.
Als Variante dazu besteht auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Steuerbacl<en nicht als separates Element ausgebildet sind. Sie können beispielsweise je einstückig zusammen mit dem entsprechenden Hebel hergestellt sein, oder aber die Hebel können auch derart geformt sein, dass beispielsweise ein Bogen im Hebel die Funktion einer Steuerbacl<e übernimmt. In dieser letzten Variante umfassen die Hebel einen steuerbacl<igartigen Bogen, welcher ebenfalls unter den Begriff Steuerbacl<e zu fassen ist.As a variant, it is also possible for the control arms not to be designed as a separate element. For example, they can be manufactured in one piece together with the corresponding lever, or the levers can also be shaped in such a way that, for example, an arch in the lever takes on the function of a control arm. In this last variant, the levers comprise a control arm-like arch, which is also included under the term control arm.
Alternativ dazu können die beiden Hebel aber auch keine auf der zur Skimitte gerichteten Seite der Hebel angeordnete Steuerbacl<e umfassen. Falls die Haltemittel beispielsweise derart ausgebildet sind, dass sie sich leicht vom Skischuh lösen, wenn die Hebel über einen bestimmten Winkel hinaus geschwenkt werden, so kann diese Alternative vorteilhaft sein, da dadurch die Konstruktion des Frontautomaten vereinfacht und seine Herstellung kostengünstiger wird.Alternatively, the two levers may not comprise a control bar arranged on the side of the levers facing the middle of the ski. If, for example, the holding means are designed in such a way that they easily detach from the ski boot when the levers are pivoted beyond a certain angle, this alternative may be advantageous since it simplifies the design of the front automatic device and makes its manufacture more cost-effective.
Bevorzugt ist die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung entlang eines Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar, wodurch die beiden Hebel gekoppelt innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs bewegbar sind. Falls die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs entlang eines linearen Wegs bewegbar sind, sind die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung bevorzugt fest an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert, wodurch die beiden Hebel gekoppelt innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs bewegbar sind. Falls hingegen die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs um die Achsen schwenkbar sind, ist die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung bevorzugt bei einer gekoppelten Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs der beiden Hebel entlang eines Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar. Wie die Zwangssteuerung in diesen beiden Fällen genau bewegt wird, ist nicht vorgegeben. Es kann sich bei ihrer Bewegung beispielsweise um eine Bewegung in eine lineare Richtung, um eine Schwenk- oder Drehbewegung, oder um eine Kombination davon handeln. Falls es sich bei der Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung um eine Dreh- oder Schwenkbewegung handelt, kann der Zwangssteuerungsweg somit ein Drehwinkel sein. Falls es sich bei der Bewegung hingegen um eine Kombination aus linearer Richtung sowie Schwenk- oder Drehbewegung handelt, so kann der Zwangssteuerungsweg eine Kombination aus Drehwinkel und linearem Weg sein. Im Falle einer solchen Kombination besteht zudem beispielsweise die Möglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung als gesamtes in einer kombinierten Bewegung bewegt wird. Es besteht beispielsweise aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass ein oder mehrere Elemente der Zwangssteuerung in eine lineare Richtung bewegt werden, während ein oder mehrere weitere Elemente der Zwangssteuerung gedreht oder geschwenkt werden. Alle derartigen Bewegungen der Zwangssteuerung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs haben den Vorteil, dass in der Festhaltestellung auf einfache Art und Weise eine gekoppelte Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel entlang des dynamischen Bereichs erreicht werden kann.Preferably, the forced control is movable in the holding position along a forced control path, whereby the two levers are coupled and movable within the dynamic range. If the two levers are coupled and movable within the dynamic range along a linear path, the two levers in the holding position are preferably fixedly mounted on the forced control, whereby the two levers are coupled and movable within the dynamic range. If, on the other hand, the two levers are pivotable about the axes within the dynamic range, the forced control in the holding position is preferably movable with a coupled pivoting movement of the two levers within the dynamic range of the two levers along a forced control path. How exactly the forced control is moved in these two cases is not specified. For example, its movement can be a movement in a linear direction, a pivoting or rotating movement, or a combination thereof. If the movement of the forced control is a rotating or pivoting movement, the forced control path can therefore be an angle of rotation. If, however, the movement is a combination of linear direction and swivel or rotary movement, the forced control path can be a combination of angle of rotation and linear path. In the case of such a combination, it is also possible, for example, for the forced control to be moved as a whole in a combined movement. It is also possible, for example, for one or more elements of the forced control to be moved in a linear direction, while one or more other elements of the forced control are rotated or swiveled. All such movements of the forced control along the forced control path have the advantage that a coupled Pivoting movement of the two levers along the dynamic range can be achieved.
Falls es sich bei der Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung um eine Bewegung in eine lineare Richtung, um eine Schwenkbewegung oder um eine Kombination davon handelt, so sind die Bewegung und damit auch der Zwangssteuerungsweg vorzugsweise in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtet. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die Zwangssteuerung die gekoppelte Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel mitmachen kann, wodurch die Konstruktion des Frontautomaten vereinfacht wird.If the movement of the forced control is a movement in a linear direction, a swivel movement or a combination of these, the movement and thus also the forced control path are preferably aligned in the cross-ski direction. This has the advantage that the forced control can follow the coupled swivel movement of the two levers, which simplifies the design of the front automatic device.
Als Alternative dazu besteht jedoch auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung nicht bewegbar, sondern skifest angeordnet ist.As an alternative, however, it is also possible for the forced control to not be movable in the holding position, but to be fixed to the ski.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung bewegbar ist, so ist sie bei einer Abweichung von einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs vorzugsweise durch ein vorgespanntes, elastisches Element mit einer Kraft zur Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs drückbar. Dabei besteht auch die Möglichkeit, dass mehr als ein vorgespanntes, elastisches Element vorhanden ist. Ungeachtet der Anzahl elastischer Elemente hat dies den Vorteil, dass die Zwangssteuerung von dem oder den elastischen Elementen in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt wird, wenn keine andere Kraft auf die Zwangssteuerung wirkt. Dabei können mit der Zwangssteuerung auch die beiden Hebel in eine Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs bewegt werden. Entsprechend können die beiden Hebel unter Einwirkung einer einsetzenden, seitlichen Kraft ausgehend von dieser Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs sowohl in eine erste als auch in eine zweite Richtung entlang des dynamischen Bereichs bewegt werden, wobei sie bei Wegfall der seitlichen Kraft zurück zur Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs bewegt werden. Falls es somit beim SI<ilaufen zu einem seitlich gerichteten Schlag oder einer seitlich gerichteten Kraft auf den Skischuh oder den SI<i kommt, kann die entsprechende Energie ohne eine Loslösung des Skischuhs vom Frontautomaten aufgenommen werden, egal von welcher Seite der Schlag oder die Kraft kommt.If the positive control is movable in the holding position, then if it deviates from a center of the positive control path, it can preferably be pressed with a force towards the center of the positive control path by a pre-tensioned, elastic element. It is also possible for more than one pre-tensioned, elastic element to be present. Regardless of the number of elastic elements, this has the advantage that the positive control is moved by the elastic element(s) to the center of the positive control path when no other force acts on the positive control. The two levers can also be moved to a center of the dynamic range using the positive control. Accordingly, the two levers can be moved from this center of the dynamic range in both a first and a second direction along the dynamic range under the influence of a lateral force, and are moved back to the center of the dynamic range when the lateral force is removed. If a sideways impact or sideways force occurs on the ski boot or ski during ski skating, the corresponding energy can be absorbed by the front automatic system without the ski boot coming loose, regardless of which side the impact or force comes from.
Bei der erwähnten Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs und der erwähnten Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs kann es sich um die geometrische Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs bzw. des dynamischen Bereichs handeln. Es kann sich aber auch um eine Stelle im Zwangssteuerungsweg bzw. dynamischen Bereich handeln, welche nicht in der geometrischen Mitte liegt. Es besteht die Möglichkeit, dass diese Mitten in einem kontinuierlichen Bereich des Zwangssteuerungswegs bzw. dynamischen Bereichs liegen. In diesem Fall sind die Mitten dadurch gegeben, dass die Zwangssteuerung bzw. die Hebel durch das oder die elastischen Elemente an diese Stelle im Zwangssteuerungsweg bzw. im dynamischen Bereich gedrückt werden. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Mitten in einem Knick im Zwangssteuerungsweg bzw. dynamischen Bereich liegen. Beispielsweise kann der Zwangssteuerungsweg v-förmig sein und die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs kann in der Spitze des "v" liegen. In diesem Fall kann die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs je nach Richtung der seitlichen Kraft oder des seitlichen Schlags entlang des einen oder entlang des anderen Arms des "v" bewegt werden. Beispielsweise kann sich die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs aber auch an einem Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs befinden. Dies kann insbesondere dann der Fall sein, wenn der Zwangssteuerungsweg entlang der Skilängsrichtung verläuft. Dann kann die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von diesem Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs in Skilängsrichtung bewegbar sein, wobei die beiden Hebel aber in diesem Beispiel in der Festhaltestellung derart an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind, dass sie in Wirkrichtung der seitlichen Kraft oder des seitlichen Schlags schwenkbar sind, während die Zwangssteuerung unabhängig von der Wirkrichtung der seitlichen Kraft in Skilängsrichtung bewegt wird.The mentioned center of the forced control path and the mentioned center of the dynamic range can be the geometric center of the forced control path or the dynamic area. However, it can also be a point in the forced control path or dynamic area that is not in the geometric center. It is possible for these centers to be in a continuous area of the forced control path or dynamic area. In this case, the centers are given by the fact that the forced control or the levers are pressed to this point in the forced control path or dynamic area by the elastic element(s). However, it is also possible for the centers to be in a bend in the forced control path or dynamic area. For example, the forced control path can be v-shaped and the center of the forced control path can be in the tip of the "v". In this case, the forced control can be moved from the center of the forced control path along one or the other arm of the "v" depending on the direction of the lateral force or lateral impact. For example, the center of the forced control path can also be at one end of the forced control path. This can be the case in particular if the forced control path runs along the longitudinal direction of the ski. Then the forced control can be moved in the longitudinal direction of the ski starting from this end of the forced control path, but in this example the two levers are mounted on the forced control in the holding position in such a way that they can be pivoted in the direction of action of the lateral force or lateral impact, while the forced control is moved in the longitudinal direction of the ski independently of the direction of action of the lateral force.
Als Variante dazu besteht auch die Möglichkeit, dass nicht die Zwangssteuerung, sondern einer oder beide Hebel durch ein oder mehrere vorgespannte, elastische Elemente in die Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs drückbar sind. Genauso können aber auch beide Hebel je separat durch ein oder mehrere vorgespannte, elastische Elemente in die Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs drückbar sein. In beiden Fällen kann eine entsprechende Ausführungsform besonders dann vorteilhaft sein, wenn die Zwangssteuerung selbst skifest angeordnet ist.As a variant, it is also possible for one or both levers, rather than the forced control, to be pushed into the middle of the dynamic range by one or more pre-tensioned, elastic elements. In the same way, both levers can be pushed separately into the middle of the dynamic range by one or more pre-tensioned, elastic elements. In both cases, a corresponding embodiment can be particularly advantageous if the forced control itself is arranged fixed to the ski.
In all diesen Varianten mit dem oder den vorgespannten, elastischen Elementen ist das vorgespannte, elastische Element vorzugsweise in der Skimitte in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet. In einer ersten bevorzugten Variante davon drückt das vorgespannte, elastische Element in Skilängsrichtung auf die Zwangssteuerung, indem es einen seitlich geführten und dadurch seitlich nicht verschiebbaren Kolben in eine horizontal angeordnete, im Wesentlichen v-förmige Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung presst. Dabei kann die in Skiquerrichtung bewegbare Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs gehalten werden, indem der Kolben in eine Spitze der v-förmigen Einbuchtung gedrückt wird. Entsprechend kann die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden, wobei der Kolben durch die entsprechende Flanke der im Wesentlichen v-förmigen Einbuchtung in Skilängsrichtung entgegen der vorgespannten Kraft des elastischen Elements gedrückt wird. Dabei bewirkt die über den Kolben auf die Flanken der im Wesentlichen v-förmigen Einbuchtungen wirkende, in Skilängsrichtung gerichtete Kraft des elastischen Elements eine rücktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung jeweils zurück in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt. Um den Reibungswiderstand zwischen der Zwangssteuerung und dem Kolben zu minimieren kann beispielsweise der Kolben an seiner Spitze ein Rollenlager aufweisen, welches auf den Flanken der im Wesentlichen v-förmigen Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung abrollen kann. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass der Kolben kein Rollenlager aufweist, sondern dass der Kolben und/oder die im Wesentlichen v-förmige Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung eine spezielle Beschichtung aufweisen, welche den Reibungswiderstand reduziert. Weiter besteht die Möglichkeit, dass der Kolben an seiner Spitze ein Rollenlager aufweist, welches auf einer speziellen Beschichtung der im Wesentlichen v-förmigen Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung abrollen kann. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass der Kolben kein solches Rollenlager umfasst und dass weder der Kolben noch die im Wesentlichen v-förmige Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung eine spezielle Beschichtung aufweisen.In all these variants with the pre-tensioned elastic element(s), the pre-tensioned elastic element is preferably located in the middle of the ski in the longitudinal direction of the ski aligned. In a first preferred variant of this, the pre-stressed, elastic element presses on the positive control in the longitudinal direction of the ski by pressing a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston into a horizontally arranged, essentially V-shaped indentation in the positive control. The positive control, which can be moved in the transverse direction of the ski, can be held in the middle of the positive control path by pressing the piston into a tip of the V-shaped indentation. Accordingly, the positive control can be moved starting from the middle of the positive control path along the positive control path, the piston being pressed by the corresponding flank of the essentially V-shaped indentation in the longitudinal direction of the ski against the pre-stressed force of the elastic element. The force of the elastic element acting via the piston on the flanks of the essentially V-shaped indentations and directed in the longitudinal direction of the ski causes a restoring force which drives the positive control back to the middle of the positive control path. In order to minimize the frictional resistance between the positive control and the piston, the piston can, for example, have a roller bearing at its tip which can roll on the flanks of the essentially V-shaped indentation in the positive control. However, it is also possible that the piston does not have a roller bearing, but that the piston and/or the essentially V-shaped indentation in the positive control have a special coating which reduces the frictional resistance. It is also possible that the piston has a roller bearing at its tip which can roll on a special coating of the essentially V-shaped indentation in the positive control. However, it is also possible that the piston does not have such a roller bearing and that neither the piston nor the essentially V-shaped indentation in the positive control have a special coating.
Wenn ein vorgespanntes, elastisches Element vorhanden und in der Skimitte in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet ist, so drückt in einer zweiten bevorzugten Variante das vorgespannte, elastische Element in Skilängsrichtung auf die Zwangssteuerung, indem es einen seitlich geführten und dadurch seitlich nicht verschiebbaren Kolben gegen ein seitlich geführtes und dadurch seitlich nicht verschiebbares Schwenkelement drückt, sodass ein erster Fuss des Schwenkelements in eine im Wesentlichen v-förmige Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung gepresst wird. Dabei kann das Schwenkelement beispielsweise einen zweiten und dritten Fuss umfassen, welche je auf einer Seite der Skimitte am Schwenkelement angeordnet und zum Kolben hin ausgerichtet sind. So kann die in Skiquerrichtung bewegbare Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs gehalten werden, indem der zweite und der dritte Fuss des Schwenkelements an einer Vorderseite des Kolbens abgestützt werden und indem der erste Fuss des Schwenkelements in eine Spitze der im Wesentlichen v-förmigen Einbuchtung gedrückt wird. Entsprechend kann die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden. Dabei wird der erste Fuss des Schwenkelements, welcher in die im Wesentlichen v-förmige Einbuchtung gedrückt wird, mitbewegt. Wenn das Schwenkelement zwischen seinen drei Füssen um eine Schwenkachse schwenkbar gelagert ist, so wird dadurch das Schwenkelement geschwenkt, sodass je nach Schwenkrichtung nur noch der zweite oder der dritte Fuss des Schwenkelements am Kolben abgestützt ist. Da dabei der entsprechende Fuss zur Skimitte hin bewegt wird, wird der Kolben gegen die Vorspannung des vorgespannten, elastischen Elements bewegt. Gleichzeitig drückt die Kraft, mit welcher der Kolben gegen das Schwenkelement gedrückt wird, das Schwenkelement zurück in seine mittige Ausrichtung, in welcher der zweite und der dritte Fuss des Schwenkelements an der Vorderseite des Kolbens abgestützt sind. Entsprechend wird dadurch die Zwangssteuerung zurück in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs getrieben. In einer derartigen Variante besteht zusätzlich die Möglichkeit, dass das Schwenkelement oder die Schwenkachse des Schwenkelements etwas in Skilängsrichtung verschiebbar gelagert ist.If a pre-stressed, elastic element is present and is aligned in the middle of the ski in the longitudinal direction of the ski, in a second preferred variant the pre-stressed, elastic element presses in the longitudinal direction of the ski on the forced control by pressing a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable pivoting element, so that a first foot of the pivoting element is in a substantially V-shaped Indentation in the positive control. The pivoting element can, for example, comprise a second and third foot, which are each arranged on one side of the middle of the ski on the pivoting element and are aligned towards the piston. The positive control, which can be moved in the transverse direction of the ski, can thus be held in the middle of the positive control path by supporting the second and third feet of the pivoting element on a front side of the piston and by pressing the first foot of the pivoting element into a tip of the essentially V-shaped indentation. Accordingly, the positive control can be moved starting from the middle of the positive control path along the positive control path. The first foot of the pivoting element, which is pressed into the essentially V-shaped indentation, is also moved. If the pivoting element is pivotably mounted between its three feet about a pivot axis, the pivoting element is pivoted so that, depending on the pivoting direction, only the second or third foot of the pivoting element is supported on the piston. Since the corresponding foot is moved towards the middle of the ski, the piston is moved against the pre-tension of the pre-tensioned, elastic element. At the same time, the force with which the piston is pressed against the pivot element pushes the pivot element back into its central position, in which the second and third feet of the pivot element are supported on the front of the piston. Accordingly, the forced control is driven back to the middle of the forced control path. In such a variant, there is also the possibility that the pivot element or the pivot axis of the pivot element is mounted so that it can be moved slightly in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
Wenn ein vorgespanntes, elastisches Element vorhanden und in der Skimitte in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet ist, so drückt in einer dritten bevorzugten Variante das vorgespannte, elastische Element in Skilängsrichtung auf die Zwangssteuerung, indem es einen seitlich geführten und dadurch seitlich nicht verschiebbaren Kolben gegen ein schwenkbares Element der Zwangssteuerung presst. Dabei kann beispielsweise der Kolben in eine Spitze einer horizontal angeordneten, im Wesentlichen v-förmigen Einbuchtung im Schwenkelement gedrückt werden, wodurch das schwenkbare Element im Wesentlichen in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet wird und die in Skiquerrichtung bewegbare Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs gehalten wird. In diesem Fall kann die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden, indem das schwenkbare Element in die entsprechende Richtung geschwenkt wird. Dabei wird zusammen mit dem schwenkbaren Element auch die v-förmige Einbuchtung geschwenkt, wodurch eine der beiden Flanken der v-förmigen Einbuchtung gegen den Kolben gedrückt wird, welcher dadurch gegen die in Skilängsrichtung gerichtete Kraft des elastischen Elements bewegt wird. Dabei bewirkt die über den Kolben auf die Flanken der im Wesentlichen v-förmigen Einbuchtung wirkende, in Skilängsrichtung gerichtete Kraft des elastischen Elements eine rücktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung jeweils zurück in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt.If a pre-stressed, elastic element is present and aligned in the middle of the ski in the longitudinal direction of the ski, in a third preferred variant the pre-stressed, elastic element presses in the longitudinal direction of the ski on the forced control by pressing a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against a pivotable element of the forced control. In this case, for example, the piston can be pressed into a tip of a horizontally arranged, essentially V-shaped recess in the pivot element, whereby the pivotable element is aligned essentially in the longitudinal direction of the ski and the movable in the transverse direction of the ski Forced control is held in the middle of the forced control path. In this case, the forced control can be moved starting from the middle of the forced control path along the forced control path by pivoting the pivotable element in the appropriate direction. In the process, the V-shaped indentation is also pivoted together with the pivotable element, whereby one of the two flanks of the V-shaped indentation is pressed against the piston, which is thereby moved against the force of the elastic element directed in the longitudinal direction of the ski. The force of the elastic element acting via the piston on the flanks of the essentially V-shaped indentation and directed in the longitudinal direction of the ski causes a restoring force which drives the forced control back to the middle of the forced control path.
Bei einem schwenkbaren Element der Zwangssteuerung besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass der Kolben beispielsweise an seinem vorderen Ende ein separates schwenkbares Element aufweist, welches gegen das schwenkbare Element der Zwangssteuerung gepresst wird. Bei einer geeigneten Anordnung der Schwenkachsen der beiden Schwenkelemente kann dadurch ebenfalls das schwenkbare Element der Zwangssteuerung im Wesentlichen in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet werden und die in Skiquerrichtung bewegbare Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs gehalten werden. In diesem Fall kann die Zwangssteuerung ebenfalls ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden, indem das schwenkbare Element in die entsprechende Richtung geschwenkt wird. Dabei wird das separate schwenkbare Element am vorderen Ende des Kolbens mitgeschwenkt und der Kolben gegen die Kraft des elastischen Elements bewegt. Dies bewirkt eine rücktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung jeweils zurück in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt.With a pivoting element of the forced control, it is also possible for the piston to have a separate pivoting element at its front end, for example, which is pressed against the pivoting element of the forced control. With a suitable arrangement of the pivot axes of the two pivoting elements, the pivoting element of the forced control can also be aligned essentially in the longitudinal direction of the ski and the forced control, which can be moved in the transverse direction of the ski, can be held in the middle of the forced control path. In this case, the forced control can also be moved starting from the middle of the forced control path along the forced control path by pivoting the pivoting element in the appropriate direction. The separate pivoting element at the front end of the piston is pivoted along and the piston is moved against the force of the elastic element. This causes a restoring force which drives the forced control back to the middle of the forced control path.
Wenn ein vorgespanntes, elastisches Element vorhanden und in der Skimitte in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet ist, so drückt in einer vierten bevorzugten Variante das vorgespannte, elastische Element in Skilängsrichtung auf die Zwangssteuerung, indem es einen seitlich geführten und dadurch seitlich nicht verschiebbaren Kolben gegen wenigstens einen schwenkbar gelagerten Hebel drückt, welcher dadurch seinerseits gegen ein schwenkbares Element der Zwangssteuerung gepresst wird. Dabei besteht die Möglichkeit, dass beispielsweise zwei schwenkbar gelagerte Hebel vorhanden sind, welche derart in Skiquerrichtung gesehen nebeneinander angeordnet sind, dass das schwenkbare Element im Wesentlichen in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet wird und die in Skiquerrichtung bewegbare Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs gehalten wird. Um dies zu erreichen, können die beiden schwenkbar gelagerten Hebel mit ihren Schwenkachsen beispielsweise derart angeordnet sein, dass eine Kraft des Kolbens übersetzt auf das schwenkbare Element der Zwangssteuerung übertragen wird. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die beiden schwenkbar gelagerten Hebel mit ihren Schwenkachsen derart angeordnet sind, dass eine Kraft des Kolbens untersetzt auf das schwenkbare Element der Zwangssteuerung übertragen wird. Unabhängig von diesen Möglichkeiten kann in der vierten bevorzugten Variante die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden, indem das schwenkbare Element in die entsprechende Richtung geschwenkt wird. Wenn nur ein schwenkbar gelagerter Hebel vorhanden ist, so kann dadurch dieser Hebel geschwenkt und der Kolben durch den Hebel gegen die rücktreibende Kraft gedrückt werden. Wenn hingegen beispielsweise zwei schwenkbar gelagerte Hebel vorhanden sind, so kann beispielsweise durch die Schwenkbewegung des schwenkbaren Elements der Zwangssteuerung je nach Schwenkrichtung des schwenkbaren Elements der eine oder der andere schwenkbare Hebel geschwenkt werden, indem das schwenkbare Element aufgrund seiner Schwenkbewegung gegen diesen Hebel drückt. Dadurch kann der entsprechende schwenkbare Hebel gegen den Kolben gedrückt werden, wodurch dieser wiederum gegen die rücktreibende Kraft bewegt wird.If a pre-tensioned, elastic element is present and is aligned in the middle of the ski in the longitudinal direction of the ski, in a fourth preferred variant the pre-tensioned, elastic element presses in the longitudinal direction of the ski on the forced control by pressing a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against at least one pivotally mounted lever, which in turn is pressed against a pivotable element of the forced control. Possibility that, for example, there are two pivotally mounted levers which are arranged next to one another in the transverse direction of the ski such that the pivotable element is essentially aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski and the forced control which can be moved in the transverse direction of the ski is held in the middle of the forced control path. In order to achieve this, the two pivotally mounted levers with their pivot axes can, for example, be arranged in such a way that a force from the piston is transmitted in a geared manner to the pivotable element of the forced control. However, it is also possible that the two pivotally mounted levers with their pivot axes are arranged in such a way that a force from the piston is transmitted in a geared manner to the pivotable element of the forced control. Independently of these possibilities, in the fourth preferred variant the forced control can be moved starting from the middle of the forced control path along the forced control path by pivoting the pivotable element in the appropriate direction. If there is only one pivoting lever, this lever can be pivoted and the piston can be pushed against the restoring force by the lever. If, however, there are two pivoting levers, for example, the pivoting movement of the pivoting element of the positive control can pivot one or the other pivoting lever depending on the pivoting direction of the pivoting element, as the pivoting element presses against this lever due to its pivoting movement. This can push the corresponding pivoting lever against the piston, which in turn moves it against the restoring force.
Wenn das vorgespannte, elastische Element in Skimitte in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet ist, so besteht aber nebst diesen vier bevorzugten Varianten auch die Möglichkeit, dass das vorgespannte, elastische Element andersartig mit der Zwangssteuerung zusammenwirkt.If the pre-tensioned, elastic element in the middle of the ski is aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski, then in addition to these four preferred variants, there is also the possibility that the pre-tensioned, elastic element interacts with the forced control in a different way.
Zudem besteht die Möglichkeit, dass das vorgespannte, elastische Element nicht in Skimitte in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet ist. Beispielsweise kann es entlang dem Zwangssteuerungsweg bzw. entlang dem dynamischen Bereich ausgerichtet sein. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass es anders ausgerichtet ist und durch seine Vorspannung eine Kraft auf einen Umlenkmechanismus ausübt, welcher die Wirkung der Kraft auf eine Richtung entlang dem Zwangssteuerungsweg bzw. entlang dem dynamischen Bereich umlenkt.It is also possible that the pre-tensioned elastic element is not aligned in the middle of the ski in the longitudinal direction. For example, it can be aligned along the forced control path or along the dynamic area. But it is also possible that it is aligned differently and due to its Preload exerts a force on a deflection mechanism which redirects the effect of the force in a direction along the control path or along the dynamic range.
Der Frontautomat weist eine Sicherheitsauslösestellung auf. Zudem sind die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung vorteilhafterweise an ein Ende des dynamischen Bereichs bewegbar, wo derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher das Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg von der Skimitte wegbewegt ist, von der Zwangssteuerung freigebbar und vom anderen der beiden Hebel wegschwenkbar ist, wodurch der Frontautomat von der Festhaltestellung in die Sicherheitsauslösestellung bringbar ist. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung ermöglicht wird. Da derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher in Bewegungsrichtung liegt, wegschwenkbar ist, wird auch das entsprechende Haltemittel weggeschwenkt, wodurch ein in der Festhaltestellung festgehaltener Skischuh in seiner Bewegungsrichtung freigegeben wird, sobald die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung an das entsprechende Ende des dynamischen Bereichs bewegt sind. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass bei einer Sicherheitsauslösung eine kontinuierliche Bewegung des Skischuhs von einer in der Festhaltestellung festgehaltenen Position zu einer Freigabe in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung gewährleistet ist. Da, wie bereits vorgängig beschrieben, bei diesem Vorgang vom Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung eine vorgebbare Energie aufnehmbar ist, indem die beiden Hebel an ein Ende des dynamischen Bereichs bewegt werden, handelt es sich dabei um eine kontrollierbare, seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung.The front automaton has a safety release position. In addition, the two levers in the holding position can advantageously be moved to one end of the dynamic range, where the one of the two levers which comprises the holding means which is moved away from the centre of the ski on the dynamic path can be released by the forced control and pivoted away from the other of the two levers, whereby the front automaton can be brought from the holding position into the safety release position. This has the advantage that a lateral safety release is possible. Since the one of the two levers which is in the direction of movement can be pivoted away, the corresponding holding means is also pivoted away, whereby a ski boot held in the holding position is released in its direction of movement as soon as the two levers in the holding position are moved to the corresponding end of the dynamic range. This has the advantage that in the event of a safety release, a continuous movement of the ski boot from a position held in the holding position to a release in the safety release position is guaranteed. Since, as already described above, a predefined energy can be absorbed by the front automatic device in the holding position by moving the two levers to one end of the dynamic range, this is a controllable, lateral safety release.
Vorzugsweise sind in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel je durch eine erste Kulissenführung und einen darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert. Weiter ist vorzugsweise in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung wenigstens einer der beiden Hebel freigegeben, indem der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein aus der entsprechenden ersten Zwangssteuerung gelöst ist. Dabei besteht die Möglichkeit, dass die ersten Kulissenführungen zumindest in der Festhaltestellung den jeweiligen ersten Kulissenstein beidseitig umschliessen und führen. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die ersten Kulissenführungen den jeweiligen ersten Kulissenstein nicht beidseitig umschliessen und führen, sondern nur einseitig oder nur über einen Bereich beidseitig und ansonsten einseitig führen. Dabei bedeutet einseitig führen, dass beispielsweise der jeweilige erste Kulissenstein nur auf einer Seite die entsprechende erste Kulissenführung berührt. Dabei kann es sich bei den ersten Kulissenführungen beispielsweise um eine Fläche handeln, auf welcher der jeweilige erste Kulissenstein abgestützt ist und entlang welcher der jeweilige erste Kulissenstein bewegbar ist. In diesem Fall können die ersten Kulissensteine beispielsweise mittels eines elastischen Elements gegen die jeweilige erste Kulissenführung gedrückt werden. Entsprechend wird hier unabhängig davon, ob die ersten Kulissenführungen die ersten Kulissensteine beidseitig oder nur einseitig umschliessen, die Formulierung verwendet, wonach ein erster Kulissenstein in der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung geführt ist. Unabhängig der konkreten Form und Ausbildung der ersten Kulissenführungen können die ersten Kulissensteine auf verschiedenste Art und Weise ausgebildet sein. So können sie beispielsweise zylinderförmig ausgebildet sein. Sie können aber beispielsweise auch zylinderförmig ausgebildet sein und je eine sie umschliessende Rolle aufweisen, durch welche ihre Lagerung in der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung verbessert wird. Weiter besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die beiden ersten Kulissensteine beispielsweise klotzförmig ausgebildet sind. Zudem besteht die Möglichkeit, dass die beiden ersten Kulissensteine unterschiedlich geformte Bereiche umfassen. Beispielsweise können sie je einen zylinderförmigen Bereich sowie je einen oder mehrere weitere Bereiche aufweisen. Dabei kann beispielsweise je nach Bereich der ersten Kulissenführung der zylinderförmige Bereich oder ein anderer Bereich des jeweiligen ersten Kulissensteins mit der ersten Kulissenführung zusammenwirken. Alle diese Arten von ersten Kulissenführungen mit darin gelagerten ersten Kulissensteinen haben den Vorteil, dass in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind und in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung wenigstens einer der beiden Hebel freigegeben ist und dadurch eine bestmögliche Bewegungsfreiheit aufweist.Preferably, in the holding position, the two levers are each mounted on the positive control by a first sliding block guide and a first sliding block mounted therein. Furthermore, in the safety release position, at least one of the two levers is preferably released by releasing the corresponding first sliding block from the corresponding first positive control. In this case, it is possible for the first sliding block guides to enclose and guide the respective first sliding block on both sides, at least in the holding position. However, it is also possible for the first sliding block guides not to enclose and guide the respective first sliding block on both sides, but only on one side or only over an area on both sides and otherwise guide on one side. Guide on one side means that, for example, the respective first sliding block only touches the corresponding first sliding block guide on one side. The first sliding block guides can, for example, be a surface on which the respective first sliding block is supported and along which the respective first sliding block can be moved. In this case, the first sliding blocks can be pressed against the respective first sliding block guide by means of an elastic element, for example. Accordingly, regardless of whether the first sliding block guides enclose the first sliding blocks on both sides or only on one side, the formulation is used here that a first sliding block is guided in the corresponding first sliding block guide. Regardless of the specific shape and design of the first sliding block guides, the first sliding blocks can be designed in a variety of ways. For example, they can be cylindrical. However, they can also be cylindrical and each have a roller enclosing them, which improves their storage in the corresponding first sliding block guide. However, it is also possible for the two first sliding blocks to be block-shaped, for example. It is also possible for the two first sliding blocks to have differently shaped areas. For example, they can each have a cylindrical area and one or more other areas. Depending on the area of the first sliding block guide, the cylindrical area or another area of the respective first sliding block can interact with the first sliding block guide. All of these types of first sliding block guides with first sliding blocks mounted in them have the advantage that in the holding position the two levers are mounted on the positive control and in the safety release position at least one of the two levers is released and therefore has the best possible freedom of movement.
Als bevorzugte Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass beispielsweise einer oder beide Hebel in der Festhaltestellung und in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung je durch eine erste Kulissenführung und einen darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass sowohl in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung die beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind. Dadurch wird insbesondere eine Rückführung des Frontautomaten von der Sicherheitsauslösestellung in die Festhaltestellung erleichtert. Um dies zu erreichen, können sowohl die ersten Kulissenführungen als auch die ersten Kulissensteine wie bereits beschrieben auf unterschiedlichste Art und Weise ausgebildet sein.As a preferred variant, there is also the possibility that, for example, one or both levers in the holding position and in the safety release position are each mounted on the forced control by a first guide and a first sliding block mounted in it. This has the advantage that both levers are mounted on the forced control in the holding position and in the safety release position. This enables the front automatic device to be returned from the Safety release position into the holding position is made easier. To achieve this, both the first sliding guides and the first sliding blocks can be designed in a variety of ways, as already described.
Anstelle dieser Varianten können die beiden Hebel aber auch nicht durch eine erste Kulissenführung und einen darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sein. Beispielsweise können die Achsen der Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sein, während die Hebel an einem weiteren Element des Frontautomaten durch eine erste Kulissenführung und einen darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein gelagert sind. In diesem Fall können die Hebel sowohl in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung oder aber nur in der Festhaltestellung am weiteren Element gelagert sein.Instead of these variants, the two levers can also be mounted on the forced control by a first guide rail and a first sliding block mounted therein. For example, the axes of the levers can be mounted on the forced control, while the levers are mounted on another element of the front machine by a first guide rail and a first sliding block mounted therein. In this case, the levers can be mounted on the other element in both the holding position and the safety release position, or only in the holding position.
Alternativ zu diesen Varianten können die Hebel aber auch anders als durch erste Kulissenführungen und erste Kulissensteine an der Zwangssteuerung bzw. am weiteren Element gelagert sein. Eine solche Lagerung kann beispielsweise durch eine bewegliche Hebel- oder Kolbenverbindung ausgebildet sein.As an alternative to these variants, the levers can also be mounted on the forced control or on the other element in a way other than by means of first guide rails and first sliding blocks. Such a mounting can be formed, for example, by a movable lever or piston connection.
Falls erste Kulissenführungen und erste Kulissensteine vorhanden sind und falls die ersten Kulissensteine in der Festhaltestellung in der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung gelagert sind, weisen die ersten Kulissenführungen bevorzugt eine Geometrie auf, sodass in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg von der Skimitte wegbewegt ist, schwenkbar ist. Dabei kann der entsprechende Hebel in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung mit einer Bewegung des entsprechenden ersten Kulissensteins in der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung geschwenkt werden oder von der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung freigegeben sein. Falls der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung in der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung geschwenkt werden kann, hat dies den Vorteil, dass sowohl in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung die beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung oder am weiteren Element der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind und dass somit eine Rückführung des Frontautomaten von der Sicherheitsauslösestellung in die Festhaltestellung erleichtert ist. Falls hingegen der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung von der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung freigegeben ist, hat dies den Vorteil, dass in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung oder am weiteren Element der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind und dass in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg von der Skimitte wegbewegt ist, ungehindert schwenkbar ist.If first guide rails and first guide blocks are present and if the first guide blocks are mounted in the holding position in the corresponding first guide rail, the first guide rails preferably have a geometry such that in the safety release position that of the two levers which comprises the holding means which is moved away from the center of the ski on the dynamic path can be pivoted. In the safety release position, the corresponding lever can be pivoted with a movement of the corresponding first guide block in the corresponding first guide rail or can be released from the corresponding first guide rail. If the corresponding first guide block can be pivoted in the safety release position in the corresponding first guide rail, this has the advantage that both in the holding position and in the safety release position the two levers are mounted on the forced control or on the further element of the forced control and that it is therefore easier to return the front automatic device from the safety release position to the holding position. If, on the other hand, the corresponding first guide block in the safety release position is corresponding first link guide is released, this has the advantage that in the holding position the two levers are mounted on the positive control or on the further element of the positive control and that in the safety release position the one of the two levers which comprises the holding means which is moved away from the centre of the ski on the dynamic path can pivot unhindered.
Falls erste Kulissenführungen vorhanden sind und eine solche Geometrie aufweisen, dass die ersten Kulissensteine in der Festhaltestellung und in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung in der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung gelagert sind, so sind die ersten Kulissenführungen vorzugsweise in einem Bereich verbreitert, in welchem in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein in der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung bewegbar ist, wenn der entsprechende Hebel geschwenkt wird. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung schwenkbar ist, leichter bewegbar ist, da die entsprechende erste Kulissenstein in diesem Bereich der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung lose geführt ist und es deshalb zwischen dem entsprechenden ersten Kulissenstein und der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung zu keinem oder nur sehr wenig Reibungswiderstand kommt.If first sliding block guides are present and have a geometry such that the first sliding blocks are mounted in the corresponding first sliding block guide in the holding position and in the safety release position, the first sliding block guides are preferably widened in an area in which the corresponding first sliding block can be moved in the corresponding first sliding block guide in the safety release position when the corresponding lever is pivoted. This has the advantage that the one of the two levers which can be pivoted in the safety release position can be moved more easily, since the corresponding first sliding block is loosely guided in this area of the corresponding first sliding block guide and therefore there is no or very little frictional resistance between the corresponding first sliding block and the corresponding first sliding block guide.
Unabhängig davon, ob die ersten Kulissensteine nur in der Festhaltestellung oder sowohl in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung in der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung gelagert sind, weisen die ersten Kulissenführungen zudem bevorzugt eine Ecke in ihrer Form auf, um welche der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein bewegt wird, wenn der entsprechende Hebel bei einem Übergang von der Festhaltestellung zur Sicherheitsauslösestellung freigegeben wird. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Hebel bei einer Sicherheitsauslösung sofort freigegeben wird und somit der Übergang von der Festhaltestellung in die Sicherheitsauslösestellung rasch erfolgt.Regardless of whether the first sliding blocks are mounted in the corresponding first sliding block guide only in the holding position or both in the holding position and in the safety release position, the first sliding block guides also preferably have a corner in their shape around which the corresponding first sliding block is moved when the corresponding lever is released during a transition from the holding position to the safety release position. This has the advantage that the lever is released immediately during a safety release and thus the transition from the holding position to the safety release position takes place quickly.
Vorteilhafterweise weisen die ersten Kulissenführungen eine Geometrie auf, sodass in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg zur Skimitte hin bewegt ist, fixiert ist. Dies kann beispielsweise dadurch erreicht werden, dass der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein an einem Ende der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung anstösst. Dies kann aber auch dadurch erreicht werden, dass der entsprechende Hebel derart von der ersten Kulissenführung geführt ist, dass er an einem anderen Anschlag anstösst und dadurch an seiner Weiterbewegung gehindert ist. Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung entlang eines Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist, kann dies aber beispielsweise auch dadurch erreicht werden, dass in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung eine Weiterbewegung der Zwangssteuerung blockiert wird, wodurch auch eine Weiterbewegung des entsprechenden Hebels unterbunden wird. Dazu kann die Weiterbewegung der Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise durch einen Anschlag erfolgen. Diese drei Varianten haben den Vorteil, dass in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung eine freie Bewegung desjenigen der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg zur Skimitte hin bewegt ist, verhindert wird. Dadurch kann bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung eine kontrollierte Freigabe des Skischuhs erreicht werden.Advantageously, the first sliding guides have a geometry such that in the safety release position, that of the two levers which comprises the holding means which is moved on the dynamic path towards the middle of the ski is fixed. This can be achieved, for example, by the corresponding first sliding block abutting one end of the corresponding first sliding guide. However, this can also This can be achieved by guiding the corresponding lever by the first link guide in such a way that it hits another stop and is thus prevented from moving further. If the forced control can be moved along a forced control path in the holding position, this can also be achieved, for example, by blocking further movement of the forced control in the safety release position, which also prevents further movement of the corresponding lever. The further movement of the forced control can be achieved, for example, by a stop. These three variants have the advantage that in the safety release position, free movement of the one of the two levers which comprises the holding means that is moved on the dynamic path towards the middle of the ski is prevented. This means that a controlled release of the ski boot can be achieved in the event of a lateral safety release.
Als Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die ersten Kulissenführungen eine Geometrie aufweisen, sodass in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg zur Skimitte hin bewegt ist, innerhalb eines limitierten Bereichs schwenkbar ist, während der andere Hebel frei schwenkbar ist. Auch dadurch kann bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung eine kontrollierte Freigabe des Skischuhs erreicht werden.As a variant, it is also possible for the first guide rails to have a geometry such that in the safety release position, the one of the two levers that includes the holding means that is moved on the dynamic path towards the center of the ski can be pivoted within a limited range, while the other lever can be pivoted freely. This also makes it possible to achieve a controlled release of the ski boot in the event of a lateral safety release.
Alternativ dazu können die beiden Hebel in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung aber auch durch die Geometrie der ersten Kulissenführungen gekoppelt schwenkbar sein, wobei aber derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg von der Skimitte wegbewegt ist, proportional stärker schwenkbar als der andere Hebel ist.Alternatively, the two levers in the safety release position can also be pivoted in a coupled manner by the geometry of the first guide rails, whereby the one of the two levers which comprises the holding means which is moved away from the centre of the ski on the dynamic path can be pivoted proportionally more than the other lever.
Vorzugsweise ist die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung skifest angeordnet. Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist, kann dazu die Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise durch einen Anschlag an einer Weiterbewegung über ein Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs hinaus gehindert werden. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass einer der beiden Hebel in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung durch einen Anschlag an einer Weiterbewegung gehindert wird und durch seine Lagerung an der Zwangssteuerung die Zwangssteuerung an einer Weiterbewegung hindert. Falls die beiden Hebel durch eine erste Kulissenführung und einen ersten Kulissenstein an der Zwangssteuerung oder am weiteren Element des Frontautomaten gelagert sind, kann aber auch durch eine Geometrie der ersten Kulissensteuerung erreicht werden, dass die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung skifest angeordnet ist.Preferably, the forced control is arranged in a ski-fixed manner in the safety release position. If the forced control is movable in the holding position along the forced control path, the forced control can be prevented from moving further beyond one end of the forced control path, for example by a stop. However, it is also possible that one of the two levers is prevented from moving further by a stop in the safety release position and that the forced control is held in place by its bearing on the forced control. prevents further movement. If the two levers are mounted on the forced control or on the other element of the front machine by a first guide and a first sliding block, the geometry of the first sliding control can also ensure that the forced control is fixed to the ski in the safety release position.
Alternativ dazu kann die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung aber auch beweglich sein.Alternatively, the forced control can also be movable in the safety release position.
Wenn die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung bewegbar ist und der Frontautomat ein in der Skimitte in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtetes, vorgespanntes, elastische Element umfasst sowie die Zwangssteuerung eine im Wesentlichen v-förmige Einbuchtung aufweist, so sind vorteilhafterweise in äusseren Bereichen der beiden Flanken der v-förmigen Einbuchtung Mulden angeordnet. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass je nach Ausführungsform beispielsweise ein an der Spitze eines vom vorgespannten, elastischen Element mit einer Kraft beaufschlagten Kolbens angeordnetes Rollenlager mit einer dieser Mulden zusammenwirken kann, wenn sich die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung befindet. In einer anderen Ausführungsform kann dadurch beispielsweise ein erster Fuss eines Schwenkelements mit einer dieser Mulden zusammenwirken, wenn sich die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung befindet. In beiden Fällen haben dabei die Mulden den Vorteil, dass die rücktreibende Kraft, welche durch den Kolben oder durch das Schwenkelement auf die Zwangssteuerung wirkt und diese zu einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung minimiert oder ganz aufgehoben wird. Dabei spielt es keine Rolle, ob die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung skifest angeordnet ist oder aber bewegbar ist. Durch die Minimierung bzw. Aufhebung der rücktreibenden Kraft können die Mulden jedoch eine skifeste Anordnung der Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung unterstützen.If the forced control is movable in the holding position and the front automaton comprises a pre-tensioned, elastic element aligned in the middle of the ski in the longitudinal direction of the ski and the forced control has a substantially V-shaped indentation, then troughs are advantageously arranged in the outer areas of the two flanks of the V-shaped indentation. This has the advantage that, depending on the embodiment, for example a roller bearing arranged at the tip of a piston subjected to a force by the pre-tensioned, elastic element can interact with one of these troughs when the forced control is in the safety release position. In another embodiment, for example a first foot of a pivoting element can interact with one of these troughs when the forced control is in the safety release position. In both cases, the troughs have the advantage that the restoring force which acts on the forced control through the piston or the pivoting element and drives it to a middle of the forced control path is minimized or completely eliminated in the safety release position. It does not matter whether the forced control is fixed to the ski in the safety release position or whether it is movable. However, by minimizing or eliminating the repulsive force, the troughs can support a fixed arrangement of the forced control in the safety release position.
Als Variante dazu besteht auch die Möglichkeit, dass an einer Vorderseite des Kolbens zwei Mulden angeordnet sind. Dies ist insbesondere dann vorteilhaft, wenn die rücktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung zu einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, durch ein Schwenkelement übertragen wird. In diesem Fall kann der zweite bzw. der dritte Fuss des Schwenkelements mit einer dieser Mulden zusammenwirken, wenn sich die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung befindet. Diese Variante hat ebenfalls den Vorteil, dass die rücktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung zu einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung minimiert oder ganz aufgehoben wird.As a variant, there is also the possibility of two recesses being arranged on the front side of the piston. This is particularly advantageous when the return force, which drives the forced control to a center of the forced control path, is transmitted by a swivel element. In this case, the second or third foot of the swivel element can interact with one of these recesses, when the override control is in the safety release position. This variant also has the advantage that the restoring force that drives the override control to a center of the override control path is minimized or completely eliminated in the safety release position.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass weder in äusseren Bereichen der beiden Flanken der im Wesentlichen v-förmigen Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung noch in der Vorderseite des Kolbens zwei Mulden angeordnet sind. Eine solche alternative Ausführungsform kann beispielsweise vorteilhaft sein, wenn die rücktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung zu einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung auf andere Art und Weise minimiert oder ganz aufgehoben wird. Falls die Zwangssteuerung ein schwenkbares Element umfasst, in welchem die im Wesentlichen v-förmige Einbuchtung angeordnet ist, kann dies beispielsweise durch ein entsprechendes Zusammenwirken des schwenkbaren Elements mit der restlichen Zwangssteuerung erreicht werden.Alternatively, there is also the possibility that two recesses are not arranged in the outer regions of the two flanks of the essentially V-shaped indentation in the positive control or in the front of the piston. Such an alternative embodiment can be advantageous, for example, if the restoring force that drives the positive control to a center of the positive control path is minimized or completely eliminated in the safety release position in another way. If the positive control comprises a pivotable element in which the essentially V-shaped indentation is arranged, this can be achieved, for example, by a corresponding interaction of the pivotable element with the rest of the positive control.
Bevorzugt sind die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert, sodass sich die Haltemittel der beiden Hebel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die beiden Hebel und somit der Abstand der beiden Haltemittel in der Freigabestellung durch die Zwangssteuerung kontrollierbar sind.Preferably, the two levers are mounted on the positive control in the release position so that the holding means of the two levers are at the first distance from each other. This has the advantage that the two levers and thus the distance between the two holding means in the release position can be controlled by the positive control.
Alternativ dazu können die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung auch von der Zwangssteuerung gelöst sein. Dabei sollten aber beide Hebel bei einer Überführung des Frontautomaten von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung jeweils an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert werden können, wobei bei dieser Überführung auch der Abstand der beiden Haltemittel vom ersten Abstand zum zweiten Abstand vermindert werden sollte. Dies kann beispielsweise dadurch umgesetzt werden, dass die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung an einem variablen Abstandhalter gelagert sind. Bei der Überführung von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung kann durch diesen variablen Abstandhalter der Abstand der beiden Haltemittel auf den zweiten Abstand vermindert werden und die beiden Hebel können an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert werden. Dabei können die Hebel vom variablen Abstandhalter gelöst werden oder aber am variablen Abstandhalter gelagert bleiben. Wenn der Frontautomat von der Festhaltestellung zurück in die Freigabestellung gebracht wird, sollten umgekehrt die beiden Hebel von der Zwangssteuerung gelöst werden können und der Abstand zwischen den beiden Haltemitteln sollte durch den variablen Abstandhalter auf den ersten Abstand erweitert werden können. Falls die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung nicht am variablen Abstandhalter gelagert sind, so sollten sie dazu zuerst am variablen Abstandhalter gelagert werden können. Diese Alternative hat den Vorteil, dass der Abstand zwischen den beiden Haltemitteln nicht durch die Zwangssteuerung geändert wird, wodurch die Zwangssteuerung stabiler konstruiert werden kann und entsprechend grössere Kräfte aushalten kann.Alternatively, the two levers can be released from the forced control in the release position. However, both levers should be able to be mounted on the forced control when the front machine is moved from the release position to the holding position, whereby the distance between the two holding devices should also be reduced from the first distance to the second distance during this transfer. This can be achieved, for example, by mounting the two levers in the release position on a variable spacer. When moving from the release position to the holding position, the distance between the two holding devices can be reduced to the second distance using this variable spacer and the two levers can be mounted on the forced control. The levers can be released from the variable spacer or remain mounted on the variable spacer. When the front machine is returned from the holding position is brought into the release position, the two levers should be able to be released from the positive control and the distance between the two holding devices should be able to be extended to the first distance by the variable spacer. If the two levers are not mounted on the variable spacer in the holding position, they should first be able to be mounted on the variable spacer. This alternative has the advantage that the distance between the two holding devices is not changed by the positive control, which means that the positive control can be constructed more sturdily and can withstand correspondingly greater forces.
Vorteilhafterweise umfasst die Zwangssteuerung ein Steuerelement, an welchem die beiden Hebel gelagert sind, wobei das Steuerelement derart bewegbar ist, dass die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung auseinander bewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden und dass die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung zusammenbewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden. Unabhängig davon, ob die beiden Hebel dabei direkt am Steuerelement oder indirekt über ein, zwei oder mehr als zwei weitere Elemente am Steuerelement gelagert sind, hat dies den Vorteil, dass durch eine Bewegung des Steuerelements die Haltemittel in der Freigabestellung in den ersten Abstand und in der Festhaltestellung in den zweiten Abstand zueinander gebracht werden können.The forced control advantageously comprises a control element on which the two levers are mounted, wherein the control element is movable such that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means are at the first distance from each other and that the two levers are moved together in the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from each other. Regardless of whether the two levers are mounted directly on the control element or indirectly via one, two or more than two further elements on the control element, this has the advantage that by moving the control element, the holding means can be brought to the first distance from each other in the release position and to the second distance from each other in the holding position.
In einer bevorzugten Variante dazu umfasst die Zwangssteuerung hingegen ein Steuerelement, wobei durch das Steuerelement die beiden Hebel bei einer Überführung in die Festhaltestellung zusammenbewegt werden und sich die Haltemittel im zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dabei besteht die Möglichkeit, dass bei einer Überführung in die Freigabestellung die beiden Hebel durch ein weiteres Element des Frontsystems derart relativ zueinander bewegbar sind, dass die beiden Hebel auseinander bewegt werden und sich die Haltemittel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. Unabhängig davon, ob die beiden Hebel dabei direkt am Steuerelement oder indirekt über ein, zwei oder mehr als zwei weitere Elemente am Steuerelement gelagert sind, hat dies den Vorteil, dass die Überführung des Frontautomaten von der Freigabestellung zur Festhaltestellung durch die Zwangssteuerung erreichbar ist, während die Überführung des Frontautomaten von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung durch ein von der Zwangssteuerung unabhängiges Element erfolgt.In a preferred variant, however, the forced control comprises a control element, whereby the two levers are moved together by the control element when transferred to the holding position and the holding means are at a second distance from each other. In this case, it is possible that when transferred to the release position, the two levers can be moved relative to each other by another element of the front system in such a way that the two levers are moved apart and the holding means are at a first distance from each other. Regardless of whether the two levers are mounted directly on the control element or indirectly via one, two or more than two further elements on the control element, this has the advantage that the transfer of the front machine from the release position to the holding position can be achieved by the forced control, while the transfer of the front machine from the The locking position is moved into the release position by an element independent of the forced control.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung ein Steuerelement umfasst und falls die beiden Hebel je durch eine erste Kulissenführung und einen darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind, so sind die beiden Hebel vorteilhafterweise je durch die erste Kulissenführung und den darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein am Steuerelement gelagert. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die Zwangssteuerung einfach und entsprechend kompakt konstruiert werden kann. Als Variante dazu bestehen aber auch bevorzugte Möglichkeiten, bei welchen die beiden Hebel nicht je durch die erste Kulissenführung und den darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein am Steuerelement gelagert sind.If the forced control includes a control element and if the two levers are each mounted on the forced control by a first sliding guide and a first sliding block mounted therein, the two levers are advantageously each mounted on the control element by the first sliding guide and the first sliding block mounted therein. This has the advantage that the forced control can be constructed simply and accordingly compactly. As a variant, however, there are also preferred options in which the two levers are not each mounted on the control element by the first sliding guide and the first sliding block mounted therein.
In einer bevorzugten Variante dazu umfasst die Zwangssteuerung anstelle des Steuerelements zwei Elemente, wobei einer der beiden Hebel an einem ersten Element und der andere der beiden Hebel an einem zweiten Element gelagert ist, und wobei das erste und das zweite Element derart relativ zueinander bewegbar sind, dass die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung auseinanderbewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden und dass die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung zusammenbewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dies kann beispielsweise dadurch umgesetzt sein, dass die beiden Elemente der Zwangssteuerung durch eine Kolbenverbindung oder durch eine Schraubverbindung miteinander verbunden sind. Die beiden Elemente können aber beispielsweise auch durch eine Schwenkverbindung miteinander verbunden sein, wobei die Haltemittel durch eine Schwenkbewegung der beiden Elemente auseinanderbewegt bzw. zusammenbewegt werden.In a preferred variant, the forced control comprises two elements instead of the control element, one of the two levers being mounted on a first element and the other of the two levers being mounted on a second element, and the first and second elements being movable relative to one another in such a way that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means are at the first distance from one another, and that the two levers are moved together in the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from one another. This can be implemented, for example, by the two elements of the forced control being connected to one another by a piston connection or a screw connection. However, the two elements can also be connected to one another by a pivot connection, for example, the holding means being moved apart or together by a pivoting movement of the two elements.
In einer bevorzugten Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung anstelle der zwei Elemente das oben erwähnte Steuerelement umfasst.In a preferred variant, however, it is also possible for the forced control to comprise the control element mentioned above instead of the two elements.
In einer weiteren bevorzugten Variante umfasst die Zwangssteuerung zusätzlich zu den beiden Elementen das Steuerelement als drittes Element, wobei durch das dritte Element das erste und das zweite Element derart relativ zueinander bewegbar sind, dass die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung auseinanderbewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden und dass die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung zusammenbewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die Überführung des Frontautomaten von der Freigabestellung zur Festhaltestellung und zurück durch die Zwangssteuerung erreichbar ist.In a further preferred variant, the forced control comprises, in addition to the two elements, the control element as a third element, whereby the third element enables the first and the second element to be moved relative to one another in such a way that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means in the first distance from each other and that the two levers are moved together in the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from each other. This has the advantage that the transfer of the front automatic device from the release position to the holding position and back can be achieved by the forced control.
In einer weiteren bevorzugten Variante umfasst die Zwangssteuerung hingegen zusätzlich zu den beiden Elementen das Steuerelement als drittes Element, wobei durch das dritte Element das erste und das zweite Element derart relativ zueinander bewegbar sind, dass die beiden Hebel bei einer Überführung in die Festhaltestellung zusammenbewegt werden und sich die Haltemittel im zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dabei besteht die Möglichkeit, dass bei einer Überführung in die Freigabestellung das erste und das zweite Element durch ein weiteres Element des Frontsystems derart relativ zueinander bewegbar sind, dass die beiden Hebel auseinanderbewegt werden und sich die Haltemittel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die Überführung des Frontautomaten von der Freigabestellung zur Festhaltestellung durch die Zwangssteuerung erreichbar ist, während die Überführung des Frontautomaten von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung durch ein von der Zwangssteuerung unabhängiges Element erfolgt.In a further preferred variant, however, the forced control comprises the control element as a third element in addition to the two elements, wherein the third element enables the first and second elements to be moved relative to one another in such a way that the two levers are moved together when transferred to the holding position and the holding means are at a second distance from one another. In this case, it is possible that when transferred to the release position, the first and second elements can be moved relative to one another by another element of the front system in such a way that the two levers are moved apart and the holding means are at a first distance from one another. This has the advantage that the transfer of the front automatic device from the release position to the holding position can be achieved by the forced control, while the transfer of the front automatic device from the holding position to the release position is carried out by an element that is independent of the forced control.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung ein drittes Element umfasst, welches eine andere Funktion als das Steuerelement erfüllt, oder dass die Zwangssteuerung kein drittes Element umfasst.Alternatively, it is also possible for the forced control to comprise a third element which fulfils a different function than the control element, or for the forced control not to comprise a third element.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung ein Steuerelement ohne die zwei oben erwähnten Elemente oder aber zusätzlich zu den zwei oben erwähnten Elementen ein Steuerelement als drittes Element umfasst und falls die Zwangssteuerung bei einer Abweichung von einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs durch ein vorgespanntes elastisches Element mit einer Kraft zur Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs drückbar ist, so ist unabhängig von den vorhergenannten, bevorzugten Varianten das Steuerelement vorzugsweise derart ausgebildet, dass die rücktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, über dieses Steuerelement auf die Zwangssteuerung übertragbar ist. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass das Steuerelement mehrere Funktionen erfüllt und somit der Frontautomat aus weniger Elementen konstruiert werden kann, was eine leichtere Konstruktionsweise ermöglicht.If the forced control comprises a control element without the two elements mentioned above or, in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as a third element and if the forced control can be pressed with a force towards the centre of the forced control path by a pre-tensioned elastic element in the event of a deviation from a centre of the forced control path, then, regardless of the previously mentioned, preferred variants, the control element is preferably designed in such a way that the restoring force which drives the forced control into the centre of the forced control path can be transferred to the forced control via this control element. This has the advantage that the control element fulfils several functions and the front automatic device can therefore be constructed from fewer elements, which enables a simpler construction.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass, falls die Zwangssteuerung bei einer Abweichung von einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs durch ein vorgespanntes elastisches Element mit einer Kraft zur Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs drückbar ist, die rücktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, andersartig auf die Zwangssteuerung übertragbar ist.Alternatively, however, it is also possible that, if the positive control can be pressed towards the centre of the positive control path by a prestressed elastic element with a force in the event of a deviation from a centre of the positive control path, the restoring force which drives the positive control to the centre of the positive control path can be transmitted to the positive control in a different way.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung ein Steuerelement ohne die zwei oben erwähnten Elemente oder aber zusätzlich zu den zwei oben erwähnten Elementen ein Steuerelement als drittes Element umfasst, so ist dieses Steuerelement in einer bevorzugten Variante schwenkbar ausgebildet. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass bei einer Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs weg eine Schwenkbewegung des Steuerelements verursacht werden kann, wodurch bei einem bestimmten Schwenkwinkel des Steuerelements eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung durch das Steuerelement auslösbar sein kann. Um dies zu ermöglichen, kann das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise sowohl schwenkbar an einem anderen Element der Zwangssteuerung als auch schwenkbar am restlichen Frontautomat gelagert sein. Dazu können beispielsweise die beiden Lagerungen sowohl eine Schwenkbewegung als auch eine Translationsbewegung des Steuerelements gegenüber dem anderen Element der Zwangssteuerung bzw. dem restlichen Frontautomaten erlauben. Um eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung zu ermöglichen, kann das Steuerelement zudem beispielsweise derart ausgebildet sein, dass es ab einem bestimmten Winkel in seiner Schwenkbewegung das erste, das zweite oder sowohl das erste als auch das zweite Element derart bewegt oder freigibt, dass ein oder beide Hebel freigegeben werden und somit auseinandergeschwenkt werden können. Falls die Zwangssteuerung hingegen nur das Steuerelement, nicht aber die zwei oben erwähnten Elemente umfasst, so kann das Steuerelement aber auch derart ausgebildet sein, dass es ab einem bestimmten Winkel in seiner Schwenkbewegung einen oder beide Hebel freigibt, wodurch die beiden Hebel bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung auseinandergeschwenkt werden können.If the forced control comprises a control element without the two elements mentioned above or, in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as a third element, this control element is designed to be pivotable in a preferred variant. This has the advantage that if the forced control moves away from the middle of the forced control path, a pivoting movement of the control element can be caused, whereby a lateral safety release can be triggered by the control element at a certain pivoting angle of the control element. To make this possible, the control element of the forced control can, for example, be pivotably mounted on another element of the forced control as well as pivotably mounted on the rest of the front machine. For this purpose, the two bearings can, for example, allow both a pivoting movement and a translational movement of the control element relative to the other element of the forced control or the rest of the front machine. In order to enable a lateral safety release, the control element can also be designed, for example, such that from a certain angle in its pivoting movement it moves or releases the first, the second or both the first and the second element in such a way that one or both levers are released and can thus be pivoted apart. If, however, the forced control only comprises the control element and not the two elements mentioned above, the control element can also be designed such that from a certain angle in its pivoting movement it releases one or both levers, whereby the two levers can be pivoted apart in the event of a lateral safety release.
Als bevorzugte Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass das Steuerelement nicht schwenkbar ausgebildet ist. In diesem Fall kann das Steuerelement beispielsweise drehbar oder entlang eines linearen Wegs bewegbar ausgebildet sein. In letzterem Fall kann dieser lineare Weg in Skilängsrichtung, in Skiquerrichtung, in einem Winkel zu diesen beiden Richtungen, oder aber gekrümmt ausgebildet sein.As a preferred variant, there is also the possibility that the control element is not designed to be pivotable. In this case, the control element can be designed to be rotatable or movable along a linear path, for example. In the latter case This linear path can be in the longitudinal direction of the ski, in the transverse direction of the ski, at an angle to these two directions, or curved.
Alternativ zu diesen Varianten, in welchen die Zwangssteuerung zwei oder mehr Elemente umfasst, besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung nur das Steuerelement oder aber nur ein andersartig ausgebildetes Element umfasst.As an alternative to these variants in which the forced control comprises two or more elements, it is also possible for the forced control to comprise only the control element or only one differently designed element.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung wenigstens drei Elemente, d.h. zusätzlich zu den zwei oben erwähnten Elementen ein Steuerelement als drittes Element umfasst, sind das erste Element und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung vorzugsweise je durch eine zweite Kulissensteuerung und einen zweiten Kulissenstein am dritten Element der Zwangssteuerung gelagert. Entsprechend können das erste und das zweite Element relativ zueinander bewegt werden, indem das dritte Element relativ zum ersten bzw. zweiten Element bewegt wird. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass auf einfache und kostengünstige Art und Weise eine Betätigung der Zwangssteuerung ermöglicht wird. Dabei besteht die Möglichkeit, dass die zweiten Kulissenführungen den jeweiligen zweiten Kulissenstein beidseitig umschliessen und führen. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die zweiten Kulissenführungen den jeweiligen zweiten Kulissenstein nicht beidseitig umschliessen und führen, sondern nur einseitig oder nur über einen Bereich beidseitig und ansonsten einseitig führen. Dabei bedeutet einseitig führen, dass beispielsweise der jeweilige zweite Kulissenstein nur auf einer Seite die entsprechende zweite Kulissenführung berührt. Dabei kann es sich bei den zweiten Kulissenführungen beispielsweise um eine Fläche handeln, auf welcher der jeweilige zweite Kulissenstein abgestützt ist und entlang welcher der jeweilige zweite Kulissenstein bewegbar ist. In diesem Fall können die zweiten Kulissensteine beispielsweise mittels eines elastischen Elements gegen die jeweilige zweite Kulissenführung gedrückt werden. Entsprechend wird hier unabhängig davon, ob die zweiten Kulissenführungen die zweiten Kulissensteine beidseitig oder nur einseitig umschliessen, die Formulierung verwendet, wonach ein zweiter Kulissenstein in der entsprechenden zweiten Kulissenführung geführt ist. Unabhängig der konkreten Form und Ausbildung der zweiten Kulissenführungen können die zweiten Kulissensteine auf verschiedenste Art und Weise ausgebildet sein. So können sie beispielsweise zylinderförmig ausgebildet sein. Sie können aber beispielsweise auch zylinderförmig ausgebildet sein und je eine sie umschliessende Rolle aufweisen, durch welche ihre Lagerung in der entsprechenden zweiten Kulissenführung verbessert wird. Weiter besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die beiden zweiten Kulissensteine beispielsweise klotzförmig ausgebildet sind. Zudem besteht die Möglichkeit, dass die beiden zweiten Kulissensteine unterschiedlich geformte Bereiche umfassen. Beispielsweise können sie je einen zylinderförmigen Bereich sowie je einen oder mehrere weitere Bereiche aufweisen. Dabei kann beispielsweise je nach Bereich der zweiten Kulissenführung der zylinderförmige Bereich oder ein anderer Bereich des jeweiligen zweiten Kulissensteins mit der zweiten Kulissenführung zusammenwirken.If the forced control comprises at least three elements, i.e. in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as a third element, the first element and the second element of the forced control are preferably each mounted on the third element of the forced control by a second sliding block control and a second sliding block. Accordingly, the first and the second element can be moved relative to one another by moving the third element relative to the first or second element. This has the advantage that the forced control can be operated in a simple and cost-effective manner. It is possible for the second sliding block guides to enclose and guide the respective second sliding block on both sides. However, it is also possible for the second sliding block guides not to enclose and guide the respective second sliding block on both sides, but only to guide it on one side or only over an area on both sides and otherwise on one side. Guiding on one side means that, for example, the respective second sliding block only touches the corresponding second sliding block guide on one side. The second sliding block guides can, for example, be a surface on which the respective second sliding block is supported and along which the respective second sliding block can be moved. In this case, the second sliding blocks can be pressed against the respective second sliding block guide by means of an elastic element, for example. Accordingly, regardless of whether the second sliding block guides enclose the second sliding blocks on both sides or only on one side, the formulation is used here that a second sliding block is guided in the corresponding second sliding block guide. Regardless of the specific shape and design of the second sliding block guides, the second sliding blocks can be designed in a variety of ways. For example, they can be cylindrical. But they can also, for example, be cylindrical and each have a roller surrounding them, which improves their support in the corresponding second sliding guide. However, it is also possible for the two second sliding blocks to be block-shaped, for example. It is also possible for the two second sliding blocks to have differently shaped areas. For example, they can each have a cylindrical area and one or more other areas. Depending on the area of the second sliding guide, the cylindrical area or another area of the respective second sliding block can interact with the second sliding guide.
Als Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass das erste Element der Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise eine Zahnstange umfasst, welche im zweiten Element geführt ist und dass das dritte Element der Zwangssteuerung ein Ritzel ist, mittels welchem das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung relativ zueinander bewegbar sind. Selbstverständlich sind aber auch andere Varianten möglich, bei welchen die Zwangssteuerung wenigstens drei Elemente umfasst.As a variant, it is also possible for the first element of the forced control to comprise, for example, a rack which is guided in the second element and for the third element of the forced control to be a pinion by means of which the first and second elements of the forced control can be moved relative to one another. Of course, other variants are also possible in which the forced control comprises at least three elements.
Bei Vorhandensein der zweiten Kulissenführung ist das Steuerelement bzw. dritte Element der Zwangssteuerung bevorzugt entlang der Skilängsachse bewegbar, wobei bei einer Bewegung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine erste Richtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung durch die zweiten Kulissenführungen zusammenbewegt werden und bei einer Bewegung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine zweite Richtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung durch die zweiten Kulissenführungen auseinanderbewegt werden. Dabei kann es sich bei der ersten und der zweiten Richtung in Skilängsrichtung gesehen um die Vorwärts- bzw. Rückwärtsrichtung oder umgekehrt handeln. Beides hat den Vorteil, dass das dritte Element der Zwangssteuerung für die Überführung des Frontautomaten von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung und zurück in eine Richtung bewegt wird, welche unabhängig von der in Skiquerrichtung orientierten Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel oder gegebenenfalls von der möglichen Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung in Skiquerrichtung ist. Entsprechend kann durch die zweiten Kulissenführungen verhindert werden, dass eine in Skiquerrichtung auf einen oder auf beide Hebel wirkende Kraft eine Änderung der Relativpositionen des ersten und des zweiten Elements der Zwangssteuerung bewirken kann. Dadurch wird in der Freigabestellung und in der Festhaltestellung eine einfache und sichere Kontrolle des Abstands zwischen den beiden Halteelementen ermöglicht.If the second guide rail is present, the control element or third element of the forced control is preferably movable along the longitudinal axis of the ski, whereby when the third element of the forced control moves in a first direction, the first and second elements of the forced control are moved together by the second guide rails, and when the third element of the forced control moves in a second direction, the first and second elements of the forced control are moved apart by the second guide rails. The first and second directions in the longitudinal direction of the ski can be the forward or backward direction, or vice versa. Both have the advantage that the third element of the forced control is moved in a direction for transferring the front automatic device from the release position to the holding position and back, which is independent of the pivoting movement of the two levers oriented in the transverse direction of the ski or, if applicable, of the possible movement of the forced control in the transverse direction of the ski. Accordingly, the second guide rails can prevent a force acting on one or both levers in the transverse direction of the ski from causing a Change in the relative positions of the first and second elements of the positive control. This enables simple and safe control of the distance between the two holding elements in the release position and in the holding position.
Als Variante dazu kann das Steuerelement bzw. dritte Element der Zwangssteuerung auch nicht entlang der Skilängsachse bewegbar, sondern um eine Drehachse drehbar ausgebildet sein. Bei Vorhandensein der zweiten Kulissenführung können dazu beispielsweise bei einer Drehung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine erste Richtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung durch die zweiten Kulissenführungen zusammenbewegt werden und bei einer Drehung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine zweite Richtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung durch die zweiten Kulissenführungen auseinanderbewegt werden. Dazu können die zweiten Kulissenführungen spiralförmig um die Drehachse im dritten Element der Zwangssteuerung oder aber im ersten bzw. zweiten Element der Zwangssteuerung angeordnet sein.As a variant, the control element or third element of the forced control can also not be movable along the longitudinal axis of the ski, but can be designed to rotate about an axis of rotation. If the second guide rail is present, for example, when the third element of the forced control is rotated in a first direction, the first and second elements of the forced control can be moved together by the second guide rails, and when the third element of the forced control is rotated in a second direction, the first and second elements of the forced control can be moved apart by the second guide rails. For this purpose, the second guide rails can be arranged in a spiral around the axis of rotation in the third element of the forced control or in the first or second element of the forced control.
Falls das dritte Element der Zwangssteuerung um die Drehachse drehbar ausgebildet ist, so kann eine Lagerung des ersten und des zweiten Elements am dritten Element auch nicht über die zweiten Kulissenführungen ausgebildet sein. Beispielsweise können das erste Element und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung auch je durch ein Drehgelenk am dritten Element der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sein, wobei bei einer Drehung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine erste Drehrichtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung zusammenbewegt werden und bei einer Bewegung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine zweite Drehrichtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung auseinanderbewegt werden.If the third element of the forced control is designed to be rotatable about the axis of rotation, the first and second elements on the third element can also be mounted without using the second guides. For example, the first element and the second element of the forced control can each be mounted on the third element of the forced control by a swivel joint, whereby when the third element of the forced control rotates in a first direction of rotation, the first and second elements of the forced control are moved together, and when the third element of the forced control moves in a second direction of rotation, the first and second elements of the forced control are moved apart.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist, so umfasst sie vorzugsweise einen Schlitten, welcher entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ausgebildet ist. Dabei besteht die Möglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung zusätzlich zum bereits erwähnten Steuerelement oder den bereits erwähnten zwei Elementen einen solchen Schlitten umfasst. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung einen solchen Schlitten umfasst, welcher gleichzeitig die Funktion des bereits erwähnten ersten, zweiten oder dritten Elements bzw. Steuerelements erfüllt und somit zugleich dem entsprechend ersten, zweiten oder dritten Element bzw. Steuerelement entspricht. Dabei besteht auch die Möglichkeit, dass mehr als eines des ersten, zweiten und dritten Elements bzw. Steuerelements als Schlitten ausgebildet ist. Weiter besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung einen solchen Schlitten und keines der oben erwähnten Elemente umfasst. Dabei besteht wiederum die Möglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung nur aus einem solchen Schlitten besteht oder aber auch noch weitere Elemente umfasst.If the forced control is movable along the forced control path in the holding position, it preferably comprises a carriage which is designed to be movable along the forced control path. In this case, it is possible for the forced control to comprise such a carriage in addition to the control element or the two elements already mentioned. However, it is also possible for the forced control to comprise such a carriage which simultaneously fulfils the function of the already mentioned first, second or third element or control element and thus corresponds to the corresponding first, second or third element or control element. It is also possible that more than one of the first, second and third elements or control elements is designed as a slide. However, it is also possible that the forced control comprises such a slide and none of the above-mentioned elements. It is again possible that the forced control consists only of such a slide or also comprises other elements.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung einen solchen Schlitten umfasst, so sind die weiteren Elemente der Zwangssteuerung, sofern diese überhaupt vorhanden sind, bevorzugt am Schlitten gelagert. Dabei können die weiteren Elemente beispielsweise zusammen mit dem Schlitten in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar sein. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass eines oder mehrere der weiteren Elemente sowohl am Schlitten als auch am restlichen Frontautomaten gelagert sind. Falls die Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise ein schwenkbares Element umfasst, so kann dieses schwenkbare Element sowohl am Schlitten als auch am restlichen Frontautomaten gelagert sein und bei einer Bewegung des Schlittens in Skiquerrichtung schwenkbar sein. In diesem Sinne kann beispielsweise wie bereits erwähnt das Steuerelement als schwenkbares Element ausgebildet sein und entsprechend sowohl am Schlitten als auch am restlichen Frontautomaten gelagert sein und bei einer Bewegung des Schlittens in Skiquerrichtung schwenkbar sein.If the forced control includes such a carriage, the other elements of the forced control, if they are present at all, are preferably mounted on the carriage. The other elements can, for example, be movable together with the carriage in the transverse direction of the ski. However, it is also possible for one or more of the other elements to be mounted on both the carriage and the rest of the front machine. If the forced control includes, for example, a pivoting element, this pivoting element can be mounted on both the carriage and the rest of the front machine and can pivot when the carriage moves in the transverse direction of the ski. In this sense, for example, as already mentioned, the control element can be designed as a pivoting element and accordingly mounted on both the carriage and the rest of the front machine and can pivot when the carriage moves in the transverse direction of the ski.
Alternativ dazu besteht auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung keinen solchen Schlitten umfasst.Alternatively, it is also possible that the forced control does not include such a carriage.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung einen solchen Schlitten umfasst, so sind vorteilhafterweise die beiden Achsen am Schlitten gelagert. Dabei können die Hebel zusätzlich an einem weiteren Element der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sein. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die beiden Hebel zusätzlich nicht an einem weiteren Element der Zwangssteuerung, sondern sonst am Frontautomaten gelagert sind. Beides hat den Vorteil, dass in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel zusammen mit dem Schlitten bewegt werden können.If the forced control includes such a carriage, the two axes are advantageously mounted on the carriage. The levers can also be mounted on another element of the forced control. However, it is also possible for the two levers to be mounted not on another element of the forced control, but on the front machine. Both have the advantage that in the holding position the two levers can be moved together with the carriage.
Als Alternative dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Achsen nicht am Schlitten, sondern an einem anderen Element der Zwangssteuerung oder des Frontautomaten gelagert sind.As an alternative, it is also possible for the axes to be mounted not on the carriage, but on another element of the forced control or the front automatic device.
Vorteilhafterweise weist der Frontautomat in eine Blocl<ierstellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem dritten Abstand zueinander befinden, welcher gleich gross oder kleiner als der zweite Abstand ist und in welcher die beiden Hebel in ihrer Bewegung blockiert sind. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Frontautomat blocl<ierbar ist, wenn ein Skischuh im Frontautomaten festgehalten ist, wodurch verhindert werden kann, dass sich der Skischuh unbeabsichtigt aus dem Frontautomaten befreien kann. Falls sich ein Tourensl<ibindungssystem mit dem Frontautomaten in der Aufstiegsstellung befindet, kann somit durch die Blocl<ierstellung ein unbeabsichtigter Verlust des Skis verhindert werden. Dies könnte ansonsten beispielsweise beim Absetzen des Skis bei der Durchführung einer Spitzl<ehre in einem Steilhang aufgrund eines seitlichen Schlags auf den SI<i vorkommen.Advantageously, the front automatic mechanism has a blocking position in which the two holding means are at a third distance from one another which is the same size or smaller than the second distance and in which the two levers are blocked in their movement. This has the advantage that the front automatic mechanism can be blocked if a ski boot is held in the front automatic mechanism, thereby preventing the ski boot from accidentally coming free from the front automatic mechanism. If a touring binding system with the front automatic mechanism is in the ascent position, the blocking position can prevent the ski from being accidentally lost. This could otherwise happen, for example, when setting the ski down when carrying out a tip-toeing maneuver on a steep slope due to a sideways impact on the ski.
Als bevorzugte Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass der Frontautomat anstelle einer Blocl<ierstellung eine Dämpferstellung aufweist, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem dritten Abstand zueinander befinden, welcher gleich gross oder kleiner als der zweite Abstand ist und in welcher die beiden Hebel mit höherem Widerstand als in der Festhaltestellung innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs bewegbar sind. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Frontautomat zwar eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung ermöglichen kann, wenn ein Skischuh im Frontautomaten festgehalten ist, gleichzeitig aber eine Bewegung der Haltemittel zusammen mit dem im Frontautomaten gehaltenen Skischuh entlang des dynamischen Wegs gedämpft und entsprechend reduziert werden kann. Falls sich daher ein Tourensl<ibindungssystem mit dem Frontautomaten in der Aufstiegsstellung befindet, kann durch die Dämpferstellung eine Bewegung eines im Frontautomaten gehaltenen Skischuhs in Skiquerrichtung relativ zum SI<i gedämpft und entsprechend reduziert werden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass für einen Skiläufer beim Aufstieg die Trittsicherheit erhöht wird, während gleichzeitig die Sicherheit für den Skiläufer erhalten bleibt, indem die Möglichkeit einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung gewährleistet ist.As a preferred variant, however, there is also the possibility that the front automatic device has a dampening position instead of a blocking position, in which the two holding means are at a third distance from each other, which is the same size as or smaller than the second distance and in which the two levers can be moved within the dynamic range with greater resistance than in the locking position. This has the advantage that the front automatic device can enable a lateral safety release when a ski boot is held in the front automatic device, but at the same time a movement of the holding means together with the ski boot held in the front automatic device along the dynamic path can be dampened and reduced accordingly. If a touring binding system with the front automatic device is in the ascent position, a movement of a ski boot held in the front automatic device in the transverse direction of the ski relative to the automatic device can be dampened and reduced accordingly by the dampening position. This has the advantage that the skier's sure-footedness is increased when ascending, while at the same time the skier's safety is maintained by ensuring the possibility of a lateral safety release.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass sowohl auf die Blocl<ierstellung als auch auf die Dämpferstellung verzichtet wird. Dies kann vorteilhaft sein, falls beispielsweise der Frontautomat von einem geübten Skifahrer verwendet wird, welcher nur bei grossen seitlichen Kräfteeinwirkungen eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung wünscht und/oder benötigt. In diesem Fall kann der Skischuh auch in der Festhaltestellung durch den Frontautomaten genügend festgehalten werden, wodurch keine Blockierung oder Dämpferstellung benötigt wird. Entsprechend kann in diesem Fall durch Verzicht auf die Blocl<ierstellung und die Dämpferstellung der Frontautomat konstruktiv einfacher und entsprechend leichter ausgebildet werden.Alternatively, it is also possible to dispense with both the blocking position and the damper position. This can be advantageous if For example, the front automat is used by an experienced skier who only wants and/or needs a lateral safety release when there are large lateral forces. In this case, the ski boot can be held sufficiently in place by the front automat in the holding position, so that no blocking or damping position is required. Accordingly, in this case, the front automat can be designed to be simpler and lighter by dispensing with the blocking position and the damping position.
Falls der Frontautomat eine Blocl<ierstellung aufweist, so ist bevorzugt die Zwangssteuerung in der Blocl<ierstellung blockierbar. Dies bedeutet, dass die Zwangssteuerung in ihrer Bewegung blocl<ierbar ist, falls sie in der Festhaltestellung bewegbar ist. Falls die Zwangssteuerung hingegen in der Festhaltestellung skifest angeordnet ist, so bedeutet dies, dass die Lagerungen der beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung in der Blocl<ierstellung blocl<ierbar sind. Entsprechend hat die Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung den Vorteil, dass durch die Blockierung eines einzigen Elements eine Bewegung der beiden Hebel verhindert werden kann. Entsprechend kann der Frontautomat einfacher konstruiert sein und kostengünstiger hergestellt werden.If the front automaton has a blocking position, the positive control can preferably be blocked in the blocking position. This means that the positive control can be blocked in its movement if it is movable in the holding position. If, on the other hand, the positive control is fixed to the ski in the holding position, this means that the bearings of the two levers on the positive control can be blocked in the blocking position. Accordingly, blocking the positive control has the advantage that movement of the two levers can be prevented by blocking a single element. Accordingly, the front automaton can be designed more simply and manufactured more cost-effectively.
Zur Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung besteht beispielsweise die Möglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung durch ein Blocl<ierelement blocl<ierbar ist. So können beispielsweise ein oder mehrere Blocl<ierelemente an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sein und zur Blockierung in entsprechende Öffnungen im Frontautomaten schieb- oder schwenkbar sein. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass ein oder mehrere Blocl<ierelemente am Frontautomaten gelagert sind und zur Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung in entsprechende Öffnungen in der Zwangssteuerung schieb- oder schwenkbar sind.To block the forced control, it is possible, for example, for the forced control to be blocked by a blocking element. For example, one or more blocking elements can be mounted on the forced control and can be pushed or swivelled into corresponding openings in the front machine to block it. However, it is also possible for one or more blocking elements to be mounted on the front machine and can be pushed or swivelled into corresponding openings in the forced control to block it.
Als Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass einer oder beide Hebel in der Blocl<ierstellung blocl<ierbar sind. Dabei kann gleichzeitig auch die Zwangssteuerung blockierbar sein.As a variant, it is also possible for one or both levers to be blocked in the blocking position. The forced control can also be blocked at the same time.
Vorteilhafterweise umfasst der Frontautomat einen Steuerhebel, welcher in eine Freigabeposition und in eine Festhalteposition bringbar ist, wobei der Frontautomat durch Positionierung des Steuerhebels in die Freigabeposition in die Freigabestellung und durch Positionierung des Steuerhebels in die Festhalteposition in die Festhaltestellung bringbar ist. Dabei kann es sich beim Steuerhebel sowohl um einen schwenkbaren als auch um einen verschiebbaren Hebel handeln. Beides hat den Vorteil, dass der Frontautomat auf einfache Art und Weise kontrolliert von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung und zurück gebracht werden kann.Advantageously, the front machine comprises a control lever which can be brought into a release position and into a holding position, whereby the front machine can be brought into the release position by positioning the control lever in the release position and by Positioning the control lever in the holding position can be brought into the holding position. The control lever can be either a pivoting or a sliding lever. Both have the advantage that the front machine can be moved in a simple, controlled manner from the release position to the holding position and back.
Als Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass der Frontautomat zwei Steuerhebel umfasst, wobei der Frontautomat durch einen ersten dieser beiden Steuerhebel von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung bringbar ist und durch einen zweiten dieser beiden Steuerhebel von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung bringbar ist.As a variant, it is also possible for the front automatic device to comprise two control levers, whereby the front automatic device can be moved from the release position to the holding position by a first of these two control levers and from the holding position to the release position by a second of these two control levers.
Als weitere Variante besteht die Möglichkeit, dass der Frontautomat einen Steuerhebel umfasst, durch welchen er nur von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung bringbar ist. Dabei kann der Frontautomat beispielsweise einen Trittsporn umfassen, durch welchen er von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung bringbar ist, wobei dieser Trittsporn von einem Skischuh betätigbar ist, wenn der Skischuh für einen Einstieg in den Frontautomaten richtig zu den Haltemitteln positioniert ist. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass für den Skiläufer ein Einstieg in den Frontautomaten vereinfacht ist. Um diesen Vorteil auch bei den beiden oben erwähnten beiden Varianten zu haben, kann dieser Trittsporn auch zusätzlich zu dem einen oder den beiden Steuerhebeln vorgesehen sein, welche die Überführung des Frontautomaten von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung und zurück ermöglichen.As a further variant, there is the possibility that the front automatic device comprises a control lever by which it can only be moved from the held position to the released position. The front automatic device can, for example, comprise a spur by which it can be moved from the released position to the held position, whereby this spur can be actuated by a ski boot if the ski boot is correctly positioned in relation to the holding means for entry into the front automatic device. This has the advantage that it is easier for the skier to enter the front automatic device. In order to have this advantage with the two variants mentioned above, this spur can also be provided in addition to the one or two control levers which enable the front automatic device to be moved from the held position to the released position and back.
Falls der Frontautomat wenigstens einen Steuerhebel umfasst und eine Blocl<ierstellung aufweist, so ist der Steuerhebel vorzugsweise in eine Blocl<ierposition bringbar, wobei der Frontautomat durch Positionierung des Steuerhebels in die Blocl<ierposition in die Blocl<ierstellung bringbar ist. Falls der Frontautomat hingegen wenigstens einen Steuerhebel umfasst und eine Dämpferstellung aufweist, so ist der Steuerhebel vorzugsweise in eine Dämpferposition bringbar, wobei der Frontautomat durch Positionierung des Steuerhebels in der Dämpferposition in die Dämpferstellung bringbar ist. Beides hat den Vorteil, dass die Bedienung des Frontautomaten einfach ist.If the front machine comprises at least one control lever and has a blocking position, the control lever can preferably be brought into a blocking position, wherein the front machine can be brought into the blocking position by positioning the control lever in the blocking position. If, on the other hand, the front machine comprises at least one control lever and has a damping position, the control lever can preferably be brought into a damping position, wherein the front machine can be brought into the damping position by positioning the control lever in the damping position. Both have the advantage that the front machine is easy to operate.
Als Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass der Frontautomat beispielsweise einen separaten Steuerhebel umfasst, durch welchen der Frontautomat in die Blocl<ierstellung oder Dämpferstellung bringbar ist, oder aber dass der Frontautomat keinen Steuerhebel umfasst, durch welchen der Frontautomat in die Blocl<ierstellung oder Dämpferstellung bringbar ist.As a variant, it is also possible for the front automatic device to comprise, for example, a separate control lever by means of which the front automatic device can be brought into the blocking position or damping position, or for the front automatic device not to comprise a control lever by means of which the front automatic device can be brought into the blocking position or damping position.
Falls der Frontautomat wenigstens einen Steuerhebel umfasst und eine Blocl<ierstellung aufweist, umfasst der Steuerhebel vorzugsweise wenigstens ein Blockierelement, durch welches die Zwangssteuerung in der Blocl<ierstellung blocl<ierbar ist, indem der Steuerhebel in der Blocl<ierposition positioniert wird. Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung bewegbar ist, kann dies beispielsweise dadurch erfolgen, dass das oder die Blocl<ierelemente je in eine Ausnehmung in der Zwangssteuerung eingreifen, wenn der Steuerhebel in die Blockierposition gebracht wird. Es besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass der Steuerhebel zwei oder mehr Blocl<ierelemente aufweist, welche einen Bereich der Zwangssteuerung oder die ganze Zwangssteuerung seitlich umgreifen und die Zwangssteuerung dadurch an ihrer Bewegung hindern. Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung jedoch nicht bewegbar ist, so kann der Steuerhebel beispielsweise zwei oder mehr Blocl<ierelemente umfassen, welche, wenn der Steuerhebel in der Blocl<ierposition ist, in die Lagerungen der beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung eingreifen und dadurch die Zwangssteuerung und die Bewegung der Hebel blockieren.If the front automatic device comprises at least one control lever and has a blocking position, the control lever preferably comprises at least one blocking element by means of which the positive control can be blocked in the blocking position by positioning the control lever in the blocking position. If the positive control is movable in the holding position, this can be done, for example, by the blocking element(s) each engaging in a recess in the positive control when the control lever is brought into the blocking position. However, it is also possible for the control lever to have two or more blocking elements which laterally surround an area of the positive control or the entire positive control and thereby prevent the positive control from moving. If the positive control is not movable in the holding position, however, the control lever can comprise, for example, two or more blocking elements which, when the control lever is in the blocking position, engage in the bearings of the two levers on the positive control and thereby block the positive control and the movement of the levers.
Falls der Frontautomat hingegen wenigstens einen Steuerhebel umfasst und eine Dämpferstellung aufweist, so umfasst der Steuerhebel vorzugsweise wenigstens ein Dämpferelement, durch welches eine Bewegung der beiden Hebel in der Dämpferstellung mit einem Bewegungswiderstand belegbar ist, indem der Steuerhebel in der Dämpferposition positioniert wird. Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung bewegbar ist, kann dies beispielsweise dadurch erfolgen, dass das oder die Dämpferelemente mit der Zwangssteuerung zusammenwirken und dadurch den Widerstand einer Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung erhöhen. In einer Variante dazu oder falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung nicht bewegbar ist, kann der Steuerhebel beispielsweise auch ein oder mehrere Dämpferelemente umfassen, welche mit den Hebeln oder den Achsen zusammenwirken und so den Bewegungswiderstand der beiden Hebel erhöhen.If, however, the front automatic device comprises at least one control lever and has a damper position, the control lever preferably comprises at least one damper element, by means of which a movement of the two levers in the damper position can be subjected to a movement resistance by positioning the control lever in the damper position. If the forced control is movable in the holding position, this can be done, for example, by the damper element(s) interacting with the forced control and thereby increasing the resistance to a movement of the forced control. In a variant of this, or if the forced control is not movable in the holding position, the control lever can also comprise, for example, one or more damper elements, which interact with the levers or the axes and thus increase the resistance to movement of the two levers.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist und einen Schlitten umfasst, welcher entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist, sowie der Frontautomat wenigstens einen Steuerhebel mit wenigstens einem Dämpferelement umfasst und eine Dämpferstellung aufweist, so erfolgt in einer bevorzugten Variante die Belegung einer Bewegung der beiden Hebel mit einem Bewegungswiderstand, indem das Dämpferelement mit dem Schlitten zusammenwirkt. Falls die Zwangssteuerung aber ein Steuerelement umfasst, so kann als bevorzugte Variante die Belegung einer Bewegung der beiden Hebel auch mit einem Bewegungswiderstand belegt werden, indem das Dämpferelement mit dem Steuerelement zusammenwirkt. Alternativ zu diesen beiden Varianten kann die Erhöhung des Widerstands einer Bewegung der beiden Hebel aber auch andersartig erfolgen.If the forced control is movable along the forced control path and comprises a carriage which is movable along the forced control path, and the front automatic device comprises at least one control lever with at least one damper element and has a damper position, then in a preferred variant, a movement of the two levers is assigned a resistance to movement by the damper element interacting with the carriage. However, if the forced control comprises a control element, then as a preferred variant, a movement of the two levers can also be assigned a resistance to movement by the damper element interacting with the control element. As an alternative to these two variants, the resistance to movement of the two levers can also be increased in a different way.
Falls hingegen die Zwangssteuerung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist und einen Schlitten umfasst, welcher entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist, sowie der Frontautomat wenigstens einen Steuerhebel mit einem wenigstens einem Blocl<ierelement umfasst und eine Blocl<ierstellung aufweist, so erfolgt in einer bevorzugten Variante die Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung, indem das Blocl<ierelement in eine Ausnehmung im Schlitten eingreift. Alternativ dazu kann die Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung aber auch andersartig erfolgen.If, however, the forced control is movable along the forced control path and comprises a carriage which is movable along the forced control path, and the front automatic device comprises at least one control lever with at least one blocking element and has a blocking position, then in a preferred variant the forced control is blocked by the blocking element engaging in a recess in the carriage. Alternatively, the forced control can also be blocked in a different way.
Als Variante zur Blockierung mittels wenigstens einem Blocl<ierelement des Steuerhebels kann die Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise auch nicht nur durch wenigstens ein Blocl<ierelement des Steuerhebels, sondern zusätzlich auch andersartig blocl<ierbar sein oder aber anstelle durch wenigstens ein Blocl<ierelement des Steuerhebels andersartig blockierbar sein. Falls die Zwangssteuerung ein Steuerelement umfasst, kann sie beispielsweise durch Blockierung des Steuerelements blocl<ierbar sein. Dazu kann das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise in Skilängsrichtung in eine seitliche Führung bewegbar sein, wobei das Steuerelement aber auch nicht gänzlich in die seitliche Führung bewegbar ausgebildet sein kann, um es ausreichend an einer Bewegung in eine andere Richtung als entlang der Skilängsrichtung zu hindern und entsprechend zu blockieren. Um die Blockierung aufzuheben, kann das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung in Skilängsrichtung aus der seitlichen Führung bewegbar ausgebildet sein, wodurch es für eine Bewegung in eine andere Richtung als entlang der Skilängsrichtung freigebbar ist. Bei der in diesem Beispiel zur Blockierung verwendeten seitlichen Führung muss es sich nicht um eine Führung handeln, welche das Steuerelement seitlich gänzlich umgreift. Es kann sich auch um eine schienenartige Führung handeln, auf welche das Steuerelement geschoben werden kann. Bei der durch die seitliche Führung blockierten Bewegung des Steuerelements sollte es sich um diejenige Bewegung handeln, welche von der Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung durchgeführt werden kann. Es kann sich somit sowohl um eine lineare Bewegung in Skiquerrichtung als auch um eine Dreh- oder Schwenkbewegung handeln.As a variant of blocking by means of at least one blocking element of the control lever, the forced control can, for example, not only be blocked by at least one blocking element of the control lever, but also in another way, or can be blocked in another way instead of by at least one blocking element of the control lever. If the forced control comprises a control element, it can, for example, be blocked by blocking the control element. For this purpose, the control element of the forced control can, for example, be movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski into a lateral guide, whereby the control element can also not be designed to be completely movable in the lateral guide in order to sufficiently prevent it from moving in a direction other than along the longitudinal direction of the ski and to block. To remove the blockage, the control element of the forced control can be designed to be movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski from the lateral guide, which means that it can be released for movement in a direction other than along the longitudinal direction of the ski. The lateral guide used for blocking in this example does not have to be a guide that completely surrounds the control element on the side. It can also be a rail-like guide onto which the control element can be pushed. The movement of the control element blocked by the lateral guide should be the movement that can be carried out by the forced control in the holding position. It can therefore be a linear movement in the transverse direction of the ski as well as a rotary or swivel movement.
Falls der Frontautomat einen Steuerhebel umfasst, kann in dieser Variante zur Betätigung der Blockierung des Steuerelements beispielsweise das Steuerelement durch den Steuerhebel in Skilängsrichtung bewegbar sein. Dies kann zum Beispiel erreicht werden, indem der Frontautomat ein Führungselement umfasst, in welchem das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung gelagert ist. Dabei kann das Steuerelement zusammen mit dem Führungselement durch einen mit einem elastischen Element vorgespannten Kolben gegen den Steuerhebel gedrückt werden und dadurch entsprechend der Positionierung des Steuerhebels in Skilängsrichtung verschiebbar sein. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass beispielsweise zugleich auch die Zwangssteuerung bei einer Abweichung von einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs durch das elastische Element zur Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs drückbar ausgebildet sein kann. Weiter hat dies den Vorteil, dass das Führungselement zwar gegen den Steuerhebel gedrückt wird, aber dem Steuerhebel nicht zwingend folgen muss. Dies hat gegenüber einer direkten Lagerung des Führungselements am Steuerhebel den Vorteil, dass beispielsweise der Steuerhebel von der Blocl<ierposition in die Festhalteposition bringbar sein kann, wodurch das Führungselement gegen den vorgespannten Kolben bewegt wird. Wenn aber der Steuerhebel von der Festhalteposition in die Blocl<ierposition gebracht wird, so kann der Steuerhebel auch ohne Bewegung des Führungselements in die Blocl<ierposition gebracht werden. Falls beispielsweise das Führungselement durch ein Hindernis gehindert wird, durch den vorgespannten Kolben verschoben zu werden, kann das Führungselement auch erst dann vom vorgespannten Kolben bewegt werden, wenn das Hindernis entfernt ist. So besteht die Möglichkeit, dass das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung zur Blockierung erst dann in die seitliche Führung geschoben wird, wenn die Zwangssteuerung richtig zur seitlichen Führung positioniert ist. In einer Variante dieses Beispiels kann der Steuerhebel aber auch von der Festhalteposition in die Blocl<ierposition bringbar sein, wodurch das Führungselement gegen den vorgespannten Kolben bewegt wird. Wenn in dieser Variante aber der Steuerhebel von der Blocl<ierposition in die Festhalteposition gebracht wird, so kann der Steuerhebel auch ohne Bewegung des Führungselements in die Festhalteposition gebracht werden. Je nach Konstruktionsweise des Frontautomaten kann dies vorteilhaft sein. Als weitere Variante kann der Steuerhebel auch direkt am Führungselement gelagert sein, oder aber der Frontautomat kann gar kein Führungselement umfassen. In diesem letzten Fall kann beispielsweise die Zwangssteuerung vom vorgespannten Kolben gegen den Steuerhebel gedrückt werden und/oder die Zwangssteuerung kann auch direkt am Steuerhebel gelagert sein.If the front automatic device comprises a control lever, in this variant the control element can, for example, be moved by the control lever in the longitudinal direction of the ski in order to actuate the blocking of the control element. This can be achieved, for example, by the front automatic device comprising a guide element in which the control element of the forced control is mounted. The control element can be pressed against the control lever together with the guide element by a piston pre-tensioned with an elastic element and can therefore be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the ski in accordance with the positioning of the control lever. This has the advantage that, for example, the forced control can also be designed to be pressed towards the middle of the forced control path by the elastic element in the event of a deviation from the middle of the forced control path. This also has the advantage that the guide element is pressed against the control lever but does not necessarily have to follow the control lever. Compared to direct mounting of the guide element on the control lever, this has the advantage that, for example, the control lever can be brought from the blocking position to the holding position, as a result of which the guide element is moved against the pre-tensioned piston. However, if the control lever is moved from the holding position to the blocking position, the control lever can also be moved to the blocking position without moving the guide element. If, for example, the guide element is prevented by an obstacle from being moved by the pre-tensioned piston, the guide element can also can only be moved by the pre-tensioned piston when the obstacle has been removed. This means that the control element of the positive control is only pushed into the lateral guide for blocking when the positive control is correctly positioned in relation to the lateral guide. In a variant of this example, the control lever can also be moved from the holding position to the blocking position, as a result of which the guide element is moved against the pre-tensioned piston. If, however, in this variant the control lever is moved from the blocking position to the holding position, the control lever can also be brought into the holding position without moving the guide element. Depending on the design of the front automatic device, this can be advantageous. As a further variant, the control lever can also be mounted directly on the guide element, or the front automatic device can not include a guide element at all. In this last case, for example, the positive control can be pressed against the control lever by the pre-tensioned piston and/or the positive control can also be mounted directly on the control lever.
Nebst diesen Varianten besteht auch die Möglichkeit, dass nicht nur das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung, sondern dass ein anderes Element der Zwangssteuerung oder die ganze Zwangsteuerung wie für das Steuerelement beschrieben in Skilängsrichtung in und aus der seitlichen Führung bewegbar ist. Dies ist selbstverständlich eine Variante, welche auch dann möglich ist, wenn die Zwangssteuerung mehr oder weniger als drei Elemente umfasst.In addition to these variants, it is also possible for not only the control element of the forced control, but also another element of the forced control or the entire forced control to be movable in and out of the lateral guide in the longitudinal direction of the ski as described for the control element. This is of course a variant that is also possible if the forced control comprises more or fewer than three elements.
Die Haltemittel sind Stifte, welche derart am jeweiligen Hebel angeordnet sind, dass sie ausgehend vom jeweiligen Hebel mit einem freien Ende zur Skimitte zeigen. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Skischuh, welcher im Zehenbereich im Frontautomaten gehalten werden kann, auf einfache Art und Weise schwenkbar um eine horizontal in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete Achse schwenkbar im Frontautomaten gelagert werden kann, wenn der Skischuh in seinem Zehenbereich zwei seitliche Ausnehmungen aufweist.The holding means are pins which are arranged on the respective lever in such a way that they point with a free end towards the middle of the ski, starting from the respective lever. This has the advantage that the ski boot, which can be held in the toe area in the front automatic device, can be easily pivoted around an axis aligned horizontally in the transverse direction of the ski in the front automatic device if the ski boot has two lateral recesses in its toe area.
In einer ersten bevorzugten Variante davon weisen die Stifte spitze freie Enden auf. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Skischuh, welcher im Frontautomat gehalten werden sollte, präzise um die horizontal in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete Achse schwenkbar im Frontautomaten gelagert werden kann.In a first preferred variant, the pins have pointed free ends. This has the advantage that the ski boot, which should be held in the front machine, can be stored in the front machine so that it can pivot precisely around the axis that is aligned horizontally in the transverse direction of the ski.
In einer zweiten bevorzugten Variante davon weisen die Stifte abgerundete freie Enden auf. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass sich der Skischuh bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung einfach aus dem Frontautomaten lösen kann.In a second preferred variant, the pins have rounded free ends. This has the advantage that the ski boot can easily be released from the front automatic device in the event of a lateral safety release.
In einer dritten bevorzugten Variante weisen die Stifte zu ihren freien Enden hin spitz zulaufende Bereiche auf, wobei die freien Enden der Stifte abgerundet sind. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass durch eine geeignete Wahl der Grösse der spitz zulaufenden Bereiche und der Grösse der abgerundeten Enden der Stifte eine Optimierung zwischen präzis schwenkbarer Lagerung des Skischuhs um die horizontal in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete Achse und guter Lösbarkeit des Skischuhs aus dem Frontautomaten bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung erreicht werden kann.In a third preferred variant, the pins have tapered areas towards their free ends, with the free ends of the pins being rounded. This has the advantage that by selecting the appropriate size of the tapered areas and the size of the rounded ends of the pins, an optimization can be achieved between precisely pivoting support of the ski boot around the horizontal axis aligned in the transverse direction of the ski and good detachability of the ski boot from the front automatic device in the event of a lateral safety release.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Möglichkeit, dass die Haltemittel anders ausgebildet sind.Alternatively, it is also possible that the holding devices are designed differently.
Vorteilhafterweise umfasst der Frontautomat ein an einem SI<i befestigbares Gehäuse sowie ein am SI<i befestigbares Niederhalteelement. Dabei ist das Gehäuse vorzugsweise in seinem vorderen Bereich auf einem SI<i befestigbar, während es in seinem hinteren Bereich durch das Niederhalteelement in Skilängsrichtung bewegbar gelagert ist, wobei das Gehäuse durch das am SI<i befestigte Niederhalteelement in seinem hinteren Bereich auf dem SI<i gehalten werden kann. In einer bevorzugten Variante dazu ist das Gehäuse in seinem hinteren Bereich auf einem SI<i befestigbar, während es in seinem vorderen Bereich durch das Niederhalteelement in Skilängsrichtung bewegbar gelagert ist, wobei das Gehäuse durch das am SI<i befestigte Niederhalteelement in seinem vorderen Bereich auf dem SI<i gehalten werden kann. Beides führt dazu, dass im montierten Zustand, wenn der Frontautomat auf einem SI<i befestigt ist, das Gehäuse in seinem vorderen bzw. hinteren Bereich am SI<i befestigt ist, während der hintere bzw. vordere Bereich des Gehäuses in der Längsführung des am SI<i befestigten Niederhalteelements gehalten ist und sich in Skilängsrichtung relativ zum Niederhalteelement bewegen kann. Dadurch wird ermöglicht, dass sich der SI<i beim Skifahren durchbiegen kann, wobei sich der Frontautomat der Biegung des Skis anpasst, indem das Gehäuse gegenüber dem Niederhalteelement in Skilängsrichtung bewegt wird. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Frontautomat zu keiner Versteifung des Skis führt, wodurch für den Skifahrer der Fahrkomfort optimiert ist. Dabei ist zu bemerken, dass dieser Vorteil auch bei einem beliebigen anderen Frontautomaten oder einem beliebigen Fersenautomaten einer Tourenskibindung des eingangs erwähnten zweiten Typs erzielt werden kann, wenn die tragende Struktur wie hier das Gehäuse an einem Ende am SI<i befestigt wird, während das andere Ende der tragenden Struktur in der Längsführung des am SI<i befestigten Niederhalteelements gehalten ist und sich in Skilängsrichtung relativ zum Niederhalteelement bewegen kann.Advantageously, the front automatic device comprises a housing which can be fastened to a ski and a hold-down element which can be fastened to the ski. The housing can preferably be fastened to a ski in its front region, while in its rear region it is mounted so as to be movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski by the hold-down element, wherein the housing can be held on the ski in its rear region by the hold-down element fastened to the ski. In a preferred variant, the housing can be fastened to a ski in its rear region, while in its front region it is mounted so as to be movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski by the hold-down element fastened to the ski, wherein the housing can be held on the ski in its front region by the hold-down element fastened to the ski. Both of these things mean that when the front automat is mounted on a SI<i, the housing is attached to the SI<i in its front or rear area, while the rear or front area of the housing is held in the longitudinal guide of the hold-down element attached to the SI<i and can move in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the hold-down element. This allows the SI<i to bend when skiing, with the front automat adapting to the bend of the ski by moving the housing in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the hold-down element. This has the advantage that the front automat does not stiffen the ski, which optimises comfort for the skier. It should be noted that this advantage can also be achieved with any other automatic front mechanism or any automatic heel mechanism of a touring ski binding of the second type mentioned above, if the supporting structure, such as the housing here, is attached to the SI<i at one end, while the other end of the supporting structure is held in the longitudinal guide of the hold-down element attached to the SI<i and can move in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the hold-down element.
In einer weiteren bevorzugten Variante dazu kann der Frontautomat aber auch andersartig an einem SI<i befestigbar sein. Beispielsweise kann der Frontautomat ein Gehäuse umfassen, welches fest am SI<i befestigbar ist, wobei der Frontautomat ein separates Niederhalteelement umfasst. Dies hat beispielsweise den Vorteil, dass der Frontautomat einfacher und daher kostengünstiger hergestellt werden kann.In a further preferred variant, the front machine can also be attached to an SI<i in a different way. For example, the front machine can comprise a housing which can be firmly attached to the SI<i, with the front machine comprising a separate hold-down element. This has the advantage, for example, that the front machine can be manufactured more simply and therefore more cost-effectively.
Aus der nachfolgenden Detailbeschreibung und der Gesamtheit der Patentansprüche ergeben sich weitere vorteilhafte Ausführungsformen und Merkmalskombinationen der Erfindung.Further advantageous embodiments and combinations of features of the invention emerge from the following detailed description and the entirety of the patent claims.
Die zur Erläuterung des Ausführungsbeispiels verwendeten Zeichnungen zeigen:
- Fig. 1a, b, c
- eine Schrägansicht eines erfindungsgemässen Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung, in der Festhaltestellung und in der Blockierstellung,
- Fig. 2
- eine schematische Schrägansicht des Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung mit einem im Frontautomaten gelagerten Skischuh,
- Fig. 3
- eine Explosionszeichnung des Frontautomaten,
- Fig. 4a, b, c
- drei verschiedene Ansichten des Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung,
- Fig. 5a, b, c
- drei verschiedene Ansichten des Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung,
- Fig. 6a, b, c, d
- drei verschiedene Ansichten des Frontautomaten in der Blockierstellung,
- Fig. 7a, b, c
- durch eine Zwangssteuerung verlaufende Querschnitte durch den Frontautomaten jeweils zusammen mit einem schematisch dargestellten Schnitt durch einen unteren Bereich eines Skischuhs zur Illustration einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung des Frontautomaten,
- Fig. 8a, b, c
- Ansichten des Frontautomaten von unten zur Illustration einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung des Frontautomaten, wobei eine Bodenplatte und ein Führungselement jeweils ausgeblendet sind,
- Fig. 9
- einen vertikalen Längsschnitt durch den Frontautomaten in der Blockierstellung, wobei ein Skischuh im Frontautomaten gelagert ist,
- Fig. 10
- eine Aufsicht auf den Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung mit einem darin gehaltenen SI<isschuh,
- Fig 11a, b, c
- Ansichten des Frontautomaten von unten zur Illustration einer Ausführungsmöglichkeit des Zusammenspiels eines Kolbens mit der Zwangssteuerung,
- Fig. 12a, b, c
- Ansichten des Frontautomaten von unten zur Illustration einer weiteren Ausführungsmöglichkeit des Zusammenspiels des Kolbens mit der Zwangssteuerung,
- Fig 13a, b
- durch die Zwangssteuerung verlaufende Querschnitte durch den Frontautomaten zur Illustration von Ausführungsmöglichkeiten, welche eine seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung des Frontautomaten erleichtern können,
- Fig. 14a, b, c,
- d eine Schrägansicht eines weiteren erfindungsgemässen Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung, in der Festhaltestellung und in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung,
- Fig. 15
- eine Explosionszeichnung des weiteren Frontautomaten,
- Fig. 16a, b
- zwei vergrösserte Ausschnitte aus der in
Figur 15 gezeigten Explosionszeichnung, - Fig. 17a, b
- zwei verschiedene Schnittansichten des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung,
- Fig. 18a, b
- zwei verschiedene Schnittansichten des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung, wobei sich die Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs befindet,
- Fig. 19a, b
- zwei verschiedene Schnittansichten des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung, wobei sich die Zwangssteuerung beinahe an einem Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs befindet,
- Fig. 20a, b
- zwei verschiedene Schnittansichten des Frontautomaten in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung,
- Fig. 21a, b
- zwei weitere Schnittansichten des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung,
- Fig. 22
- eine weitere Schnittansicht des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung,
- Fig. 23a, b
- zwei Schnittansichten des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Blocl<ierstellung,
- Fig. 24a, b, c
- drei Schnittansichten einer Querschnittsdarstellung des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung, der Festhaltestellung und in der Blocl<ierstellung,
- Fig. 25
- eine Explosionszeichnung eines weiteren erfindungsgemässen Frontautomaten,
- Fig. 26
- ein vergrösserter Ausschnitt aus der in
gezeigten Explosionszeichnung,Figur 25 - Fig. 27a, b, c
- drei Unteransichten des in den
Figuren 25 - 26 gezeigten weiteren Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung und in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung, - Fig. 28
- eine Explosionszeichnung eines weiteren erfindungsgemässen Frontautomaten,
- Fig. 29a, b, c
- je eine Unteransicht eines horizontal ausgerichteten Querschnitts durch den in
Figur 28 gezeigten, weiteren Frontautomaten, wobei die Querschnitte jeweils durch ein Schwenkelement des Frontautomaten verlaufen, - Fig. 30a, b, c
- je einen vertikal ausgerichteten, entlang der Skimitte in Skilängsrichtung verlaufenden Querschnitt durch den in den
Figuren 28 - 29c gezeigten, weiteren Frontautomaten und - Fig. 31
- eine Explosionszeichnung eines weiteren erfindungsgemässen Frontautomaten,.
- Fig. 1a, b, c
- an oblique view of a front automatic device according to the invention in the release position, in the holding position and in the blocking position,
- Fig.2
- a schematic oblique view of the front automatic device in the holding position with a ski boot stored in the front automatic device,
- Fig.3
- an exploded view of the front machine,
- Fig. 4a, b, c
- three different views of the front machine in the release position,
- Fig. 5a, b, c
- three different views of the front machine in the holding position,
- Fig. 6a, b, c, d
- three different views of the front machine in the blocking position,
- Fig. 7a, b, c
- cross-sections through the front automatic device running through a forced control, each together with a schematically shown section through a lower area of a ski boot to illustrate a lateral safety release of the front automatic device,
- Fig. 8a, b, c
- Views of the front machine from below to illustrate a lateral safety release of the front machine, with a base plate and a guide element each hidden,
- Fig.9
- a vertical longitudinal section through the front automatic device in the blocking position, with a ski boot stored in the front automatic device,
- Fig.10
- a view of the front machine in the holding position with a safety shoe held in it,
- Fig. 11a, b, c
- Views of the front automaton from below to illustrate one possible design of the interaction of a piston with the forced control,
- Fig. 12a, b, c
- Views of the front automaton from below to illustrate another possible design of the interaction of the piston with the forced control,
- Fig. 13a, b
- Cross sections through the front automatic device running through the forced control to illustrate design options that can facilitate a lateral safety release of the front automatic device,
- Fig. 14a, b, c,
- d an oblique view of another front automatic device according to the invention in the release position, in the holding position and in the safety release position,
- Fig. 15
- an exploded view of the other front machine,
- Fig. 16a, b
- two enlarged sections from the
Figure 15 shown exploded view, - Fig. 17a, b
- two different sectional views of the other front machine in the release position,
- Fig. 18a, b
- two different sectional views of the other front machine in the holding position, with the forced control located in the middle of the forced control path,
- Fig. 19a, b
- two different sectional views of the other front machine in the holding position, with the forced control located almost at one end of the forced control path,
- Fig. 20a, b
- two different sectional views of the front machine in the safety release position,
- Fig. 21a, b
- two further sectional views of the other front machine in the release position,
- Fig. 22
- another sectional view of the other front machine in the holding position,
- Fig. 23a, b
- two sectional views of the other front machine in the blocking position,
- Fig. 24a, b, c
- three sectional views of a cross-sectional view of the further front machine in the release position, the holding position and the blocking position,
- Fig. 25
- an exploded view of another front-loading machine according to the invention,
- Fig. 26
- an enlarged section of the
Figure 25 shown exploded view, - Fig. 27a, b, c
- three sub-views of the
Figures 25 - 26 shown other front automatics in the holding position and in the safety release position, - Fig. 28
- an exploded view of another front-loading machine according to the invention,
- Fig. 29a, b, c
- a bottom view of a horizontally aligned cross section through the
Figure 28 shown, further front machines, whereby the cross sections each run through a swivel element of the front machine, - Fig. 30a, b, c
- a vertically aligned cross-section running along the centre of the ski in the longitudinal direction of the ski through the
Figures 28 - 29c shown, other front machines and - Fig. 31
- an exploded drawing of another front-loading machine according to the invention.
Grundsätzlich sind in den Figuren gleiche Teile mit gleichen Bezugszeichen versehen.In principle, identical parts in the figures are provided with identical reference symbols.
Die
Der Frontautomat 1 umfasst ein Gehäuse 2, einen Steuerhebel 3 sowie einen Trittsporn 4 aus Kunststoff. Weiter umfasst der Frontautomat 1 zwei Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 aus Aluminium mit je einem Haltesporn 6.1, 6.2 aus Stahl. Die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 sind seitlich, sich in Skiquerrichtung gegenüberliegend, angeordnet. Sie sind je um eine Achse 9.1, 9.2 schwenkbar gelagert (siehe
Vor den beiden Schwenkhebeln 5.1, 5.2 ist in einer Skimitte der Trittsporn 4 um eine horizontal in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete Querachse 7 schwenkbar gelagert. Ein freies Ende des Trittsporns 4 reicht oberhalb der Zwangssteuerung 20 nach hinten zwischen die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2. In der Freigabestellung (
Nebst dem Trittsporn 4 ist auch der Steuerhebel 3 um die Querachse 7 schwenkbar gelagert. Ein freies Ende des Steuerhebels 3, welches zu dessen Betätigung dient, weist nach vorne. In der Freigabestellung (
In der Freigabestellung sind die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 etwas auseinandergeschwenkt und die beiden Haltesporne 6.1, 6.2 befinden sich in einem ersten Abstand zueinander (
Um eine Überführung des Frontautomaten 1 von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung zu erreichen, bei welcher ein Skischuh im Frontautomaten 1 gelagert wird, kann der Skischuh in aufrechter, sl<iparalleler Ausrichtung mit seinem Zehenbereich zwischen den beiden Schwenkhebeln 5.1, 5.2 positioniert und sachte nach unten bewegt werden. Dabei wird der Trittsporn 4 von einer Sohle des Skischuhs nach unten gedrückt, wodurch der Frontautomat 1 in die Festhaltestellung überführt wird. Wenn der Skischuh richtig positioniert ist, greifen dabei die beiden Haltesporne 6.1, 6.2 in seitliche Lagerbuchsen des Skischuhs ein, indem die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 zusammenbewegt werden. Gleichzeitig wird durch das Hinunterdrücken des Trittsporns 4 auch der Steuerhebel 3 in die Festhalteposition hochgeschwenkt. Bei dieser Überführung des Frontautomaten 1 von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung kann der Steuerhebel 3 auch gleichzeitig manuell von der Freigabeposition in die Festhalteposition hochgehoben werden.In order to transfer the
Hinter den beiden Schwenkhebeln 5.1, 5.2 weist das Gehäuse 2 einen Führungsbalken 14 auf, welcher in Skiquerrichtung von einer ersten Seite zu einer zweiten Seite des Gehäuses 2 verläuft. Dieser Führungsbalken 14 ist gegenüber dem restlichen Gehäuse 2 etwas erhöht und dient dazu, einen Skischuh daran zu hindern, ganz auf dem Gehäuse 2 abgestellt zu werden. Im Falle einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung dient er zudem dazu, eine Bewegung des Skischuhs in seitlicher Richtung zu unterstützen und zu verhindern, dass sich eine Sohle des Skischuhs mit dem restlichen Gehäuse 2 verfangen kann. Um diese Funktion zu optimieren, kann der Führungsbalken 14 in seinem oberen Bereich ein Gleitelement aufweisen, auf welchem die Sohle des Skischuhs gleiten kann. Ein solches Gleitelement kann beispielsweise aus Teflon gefertigt sein.Behind the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2, the
In einem vom Gehäuse 2 und der Bodenplatte 30 umschlossenen Innenraum des Frontautomaten 1 sind mehrere Elemente angeordnet. So ist in einem hinteren Bereich des Gehäuses 2 in der Skimitte ein aus Kunststoff gefertigter I<olben 35 angeordnet. Dieser I<olben 35 ist in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet. In einem oberen Bereich weist er eine in seiner Längsrichtung ausgerichtete Führung auf, die in ein entsprechendes Gegenstück im Gehäuse 2 eingreifen kann. Dadurch ist der I<olben 35 in Skilängsrichtung geführt. In seinem hinteren Bereich weist der Kolben 35 eine Öffnung auf, in welche eine in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtete Spiralfeder 36 eingeführt ist. Diese Spiralfeder 36 stösst mit ihrem hinteren Ende gegen eine Sperrmutter 37, welche mit einem Gewinde auf eine in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtete Stellschraube 38 geschraubt ist. Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 1 ist ein Kopf der Stellschraube 38 in einer Öffnung 39 in einer nach hinten ausgerichteten Seitenwand des Gehäuses 2 gelagert. Dabei ist die Stellschraube 38 von aussen durch die Öffnung 39 drehbar.Several elements are arranged in an interior of the front
Vor dem I<olben 35 ist im Gehäuse 2 ein aus Kunststoff gefertigtes Führungselement 50 gelagert. Dieses Führungselement 50 weist in einem hinteren Bereich beidseitig je einen nach hinten weisenden Arm auf. Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 1 ist der I<olben 35 von vorne her beidseitig von diesen Armen umgriffen. Weiter weist das Führungselement 50 in einem vorderen Bereich beidseitig je einen nach vorne zeigenden, kurzen Arm auf. Diese beiden Arme umfassen in einem vorderen Bereich je einen nach oben zeigenden Noppen 51.1, 51.2. Nach hinten werden diese beiden Arme durch eine vertikal und in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete, einen vorderen Anschlag 52 bildende Platte von einem Mittelbereich 53 des Führungselements 50 abgegrenzt. Dieser Mittelbereich 53 ist plattenförmig und horizontal ausgerichtet. Nach hinten wird er von den beiden nach hinten weisenden Armen abgegrenzt, welche nach oben bis oberhalb einer Ebene des Mittelbereichs 53 reichen und dadurch einen hinteren Anschlag bilden. Auf dem Mittelbereich 53 ist die Zwangssteuerung 20 in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar gelagert. Dabei ist sie zwischen dem vorderen Anschlag 52 und dem hinteren Anschlag geführt und entsprechend an einer Bewegung in Skilängsrichtung relativ zum Führungselement 50 gehindert.In front of the
Wie hier in der Explosionszeichnung ersichtlich, umfasst die Zwangssteuerung 20 zwei Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 und eine Steuerplatte 20.3. Letztere ist wie oben beschrieben im Führungselement 50 in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar gelagert. Auf beiden Seiten der Steuerplatte 20.3 ist je einer der beiden Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtet angeordnet. Die Lagerung der beiden Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 an der Steuerplatte 20.3 besteht je aus einer zweiten Kulissenführung 21.1, 21.2 in der Steuerplatte 20.3 mit einem darin gelagerten zweiten Kulissenstein 22.1, 22.2, welcher am entsprechenden Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 angebracht ist. Dabei sind die zweiten Kulissenführungen 21.1, 21.2 derart ausgerichtet, dass sie in Skilängsrichtung eine Relativbewegung der Steuerplatte 20.3 zu den Seitenhebeln 20.1, 20.2 erlauben, wodurch die beiden Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 zusammengezogen bzw. auseinandergestossen werden. An äusseren Enden der Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 sind die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 gelagert. Dazu umfassen die Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 je eine erste Kulissenführung 23.1, 23.2, in welcher je ein am entsprechenden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 angeordneter erster Kulissenstein 24.1, 24.2 gelagert ist. Dabei sind die ersten Kulissensteine 24.1, 24.2 am jeweiligen Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 oberhalb der Achsen 9.1, 9.2 angeordnet, um welche die Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 schwenkbar am Gehäuse 2 gelagert sind.As can be seen in the exploded view, the forced
Nebst den zweiten Kulissenführungen 21.1, 21.2 weist die Steuerplatte 20.3 zwei Einschnitte 27.1, 27.2 auf, welche auf einer nach vorne ausgerichteten Seite der Steuerplatte 20.3 nebeneinander angeordnet sind. In diese beiden Einschnitte 27.1, 27.2 können zwei am Steuerhebel 3 angebrachte Riegel 28.1, 28.2 eingreifen. Dadurch kann die Steuerplatte 20.3 in der Blocl<ierstellung an einer Bewegung in Skiquerrichtung gehindert werden.In addition to the second guide rails 21.1, 21.2, the control plate 20.3 has two notches 27.1, 27.2, which are arranged next to one another on a side of the control plate 20.3 facing forward. Two latches 28.1, 28.2 attached to the
Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 1 ist die Spiralfeder 36 zwischen dem I<olben 35 und der Sperrmutter 37 vorgespannt. Nach hinten ist sie über die Sperrmutter 37 und die Stellschraube 38 auf einer Innenseite des Gehäuses 2 abgestützt. Durch drehen der Stellschraube 38, wodurch die Sperrmutter 37 nach vorne oder hinten bewegt wird, kann dabei die Vorspannung der Spiralfeder 36 eingestellt werden. Entsprechend drückt die Spiralfeder 36 den I<olben 35 mit einer einstellbaren Kraft nach vorne, wo der I<olben 35 gegen die Steuerplatte 20.3 abgestützt ist. Dazu weist der I<olben 35 ein seitlich abgerundetes, vorderes Ende mit einem horizontalen Schlitz auf. In diesem Schlitz ist eine runde Stahlscheibe 40 horizontal ausgerichtet und um eine vertikale Achse 41 drehbar gelagert. Mit dieser Stahlscheibe 40 stösst der I<olben 35 in einer seitlich abgeflachten Einbuchtung 25 in der Steuerplatte 20.3 an. Wenn die Steuerplatte 20.3 im Führungselement 50 seitlich bewegt wird, rollt die Stahlscheibe 40 entlang der entsprechenden Flanke der seitlich abgeflachten Einbuchtung 25 in der Steuerplatte 20.3 aus der Einbuchtung 25 heraus (siehe
Die
Wie in
Weiter ist in der
Im Querschnitt, welcher in
Die
In
Im Querschnitt (
Die
In den
Dieses Zusammenziehen der beiden Haltesporne 6.1, 6.2 in der Blockierstellung kann auch durch einen etwas modifizierten Mechanismus erfolgen. Beispielsweise können die nach vorne verlaufenden Arme des Führungselements 50 eine Rasterung aufweisen, welche im Wesentlichen halbkreisförmig nach vorne oben verläuft, wobei der Kurvenradius nach oben hin abnimmt. In dieser Modifikation kann am Steuerhebel 3 pro Seite im Bereich unterhalb der Querachse 7 je ein Noppen angeordnet sein. Mit diesen Noppen kann der Steuerhebel 3 auf die beiden Rasterungen der nach vorne zeigenden Arme des Führungselements 50 drücken. Je weiter der Steuerhebel 3 in der Blocl<ierstellung nach oben gezogen wird, desto weiter werden die Noppen über die Rasterungen des Führungselements 50 gezogen. Durch den nach oben verjüngten Kurvenradius der Rasterungen werden dabei das Führungselement 50 und die darin gelagerte Steuerplatte 20.3 in Skilängsrichtung nach vorne gezogen. Über die zweiten Kulissenführungen 21.1, 21.2 und die zweiten Kulissensteine 22.1, 22.2 können dadurch die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 mit den Haltespornen 6.1, 6.2 zusammengezogen werden.This pulling together of the two retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 in the blocking position can also be carried out by a slightly modified mechanism. For example, the arms of the
Nebst dem Zusammenziehen der beiden Haltesporne 6.1, 6.2 in der Blocl<ierstellung werden durch das Hochziehen des Steuerhebels 3 die beiden Riegel 28.2 in die entsprechenden Einschnitte 27.2 in der Steuerplatte 20.3 eingeführt (siehe
Wenn der Steuerhebel 3 von der Blocl<ierposition nach unten in die Festhalteposition geschwenkt wird, so wird die Rasterung 12 von den Noppen 51.2 des Führungselements 50 nach hinten wegbewegt. Dabei stösst die Rasterung 12 am ersten Anschlag 52 des Führungselements 50 an. Wenn nun der Steuerhebel 3 weiter nach unten bis in die Freigabeposition geschwenkt wird, drückt die Rasterung 12 den ersten Anschlag 52 nach hinten. Dadurch wird das Führungselement 50 mit der darin gelagerten Steuerplatte 20.3 gegen den I<olben 35 und gegen die Vorspannung der Spiralfeder 36 nach hinten bewegt (siehe
Die
In der
Im Zustand, in welchem die Zwangssteuerung 20 sl<imittig zentriert ist, befinden sich die beiden ersten Kulissensteine 24.1, 24.2 im Wesentlichen oberhalb der Achsen 9.1, 9.2, um welche die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 schwenkbar sind (
Wenn die Zwangssteuerung 20 nach rechts bis an das Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt ist und die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 nach rechts bis an ein Ende des dynamischen Bereichs geschwenkt sind, so befinden sich die beiden ersten Kulissensteine 24.1, 24.2 im Knick der ersten Kulissenführungen 23.1, 23.2. In diesem Fall stösst aufgrund der Geometrie der ersten Kulissenführungen 23.1, 23.2 der erste Kulissenstein 24.2 des linken Schwenkhebels 5.2 gegen die erste Kulissenführung 23.2 des entsprechenden Seitenhebels 20.2 an und hindert damit die Zwangssteuerung 20 an einer Weiterbewegung nach rechts. Gleichzeitig ist die Zwangssteuerung 20 so weit nach rechts bewegt, dass der erste Kulissenstein 24.1 des rechten Schwenkhebels 5.1 vom Knick in der ersten Kulissenführung 23.1 freigegeben ist und sich frei im bogenförmigen Abschnitt der ersten Kulissenführung 23.1 des entsprechenden Seitenhebels 20.1 bewegen kann. Dadurch kann der rechte Schwenkhebel 5.1 frei nach unten kippen, wodurch sich der Frontautomat 1 in einer Sicherheitsauslösestellung befindet (
Die
Die
Wie bereits im Zusammenhang mit der
Die seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung, die in den
Der Frontautomat 1 ermöglicht nicht nur eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung, sondern auch eine Auslösung in Vorwärtsrichtung. Diese Frontalauslösung kann erfolgen, wenn sich der Frontautomat 1 in der Festhaltestellung oder in der Blocl<ierstellung befindet. Um dies zu illustrieren, zeigt die
Der Frontautomat 1 kann in einem Tourensl<ibindungssystem zusammen mit einem Fersenautomaten (nicht gezeigt) verwendet werden. In einem solchen System sollte der Fersenautomat eine Lagerung des Skischuhs 100 in einem Fersenbereich ermöglichen. Entsprechend ermöglicht ein solches System eine Abfahrtsstellung, in welcher sich der Frontautomat 1 in der Festhaltestellung befindet und in welcher der Skischuh 100 in seinem Zehenbereich im Frontautomat 1 und in seinem Fersenbereich am Fersenautomat gelagert ist. Weiter ermöglicht ein solches Tourensl<ibindungssystem eine Aufstiegsstellung, in welcher der Skischuh 100 im Frontautomat 1 gelagert ist und vom Fersenautomat freigegeben ist. In dieser Aufstiegsstellung kann sich der Frontautomat 1 in der Festhaltestellung oder in der Blocl<ierstellung befinden. Er ermöglicht in beiden Stellungen eine Schwenkbewegung des Skischuhs 100 um eine Skiquerachse und ermöglicht entsprechend eine Gehbewegung eines Skiläufers.The front
Wie oben beschrieben, ermöglicht der Frontautomat 1 in der Festhaltestellung eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung. Wenn ein Skischuh 100 in einem Tourensl<ibindungssystem mit dem Frontautomaten 1 gelagert ist und sich das Tourensl<ibindungssystem in der Abfahrtsstellung befindet, so ermöglicht das Tourensl<ibindungssystem dadurch eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung. Wenn beispielsweise der Skischuh 100 durch von hinten nach vorne zeigende Haltesporne am Fersenautomaten gelagert ist, kann der Skischuh 100 bei einer solchen seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung eine Drehbewegung durchführen. Dabei wird er erst seitlich vom Frontautomaten 1 gelöst, während er noch von den Haltespornen des Fersenautomaten gehalten wird. Sobald der Skischuh 100 vom Frontautomat 1 gelöst ist, kann er auch vom Fersenautomaten gelöst werden, indem er von den Haltespornen des Fersenautomaten wegbewegt bzw. weggedreht wird. Entsprechend erübrigt sich eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösemöglichl<eit durch den Fersenautomat. Es genügt, wenn der Fersenautomat eine Sicherheitsauslösung in Vorwärtsrichtung ermöglicht.As described above, the front
Der Frontautomat 1 ist optimiert für eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung bei einem Tourensl<ibindungssystem, bei welchem der Fersenautomat keine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung ermöglicht. Diese Optimierung ist in der
Wie aus den
Ähnlich wie die
Der Frontautomat 1, welcher in den
Die
Wenn die Zwangssteuerung 20 bis an ein Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt wird, so rastet der den I<olben 25 berührende zweite bzw. dritte Fuss 45.2, 45.3 des Schwenkelements 43 in einer entsprechenden Mulde 46.1, 46.2 in der Vorderseite des I<olbens 35 ein (
In der
Die
Unabhängig von den in den
Im Vergleich zu den in den vorhergehenden Figuren gezeigten Ausführungsmöglichkeiten weisen die Haltesporne 6.1, 6.2, welche in den
Die
Der hier gezeigte, erfindungsgemässe Frontautomat 201 unterscheidet sich unter anderem dadurch vom vorhergehend beschriebenen, erfindungsgemässen Frontautomaten 1, dass die Achsen (siehe
In der
In einem vom Gehäuse 202 und der Bodenplatte 230 umschlossenen Innenraum des Frontautomaten 201 sind mehrere Elemente angeordnet. So ist in einem hinteren Bereich des Gehäuses 202 in der Skimitte ein aus Kunststoff gefertigter I<olben 235 angeordnet. Dieser I<olben 235 ist in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet und in Skilängsrichtung geführt. In seinem hinteren Bereich weist der I<olben 235 eine Öffnung auf, in welche eine in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtete Spiralfeder 236 eingeführt ist. Diese Spiralfeder 236 stösst mit ihrem hinteren Ende gegen eine Sperrmutter 237, welche mit einem Gewinde auf eine in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtete Stellschraube 238 geschraubt ist. Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 201 ist ein Kopf der Stellschraube 238 in einer Öffnung 239 in einer nach hinten ausgerichteten Seitenwand des Gehäuses 202 gelagert. Dabei ist die Stellschraube 238 von aussen durch die Öffnung 239 drehbar.Several elements are arranged in an interior of the front
Vor dem I<olben 235 ist im Gehäuse 202 auf der Bodenplatte 230 das aus Stahl, Aluminium oder Kunststoff gefertigte Führungselement 250 gelagert. Dieses Führungselement 250 weist in einem hinteren Bereich eine Lagerbuchse zur Lagerung einer zweiten vertikalen Achse 249 sowie in einem vorderen Bereich beidseitig je einen nach oben zeigenden Noppen 251.1, 251.2 auf. Weiter weist das Führungselement 250 in Skilängsrichtung gesehen in einem mittleren Bereich eine vertikal und in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete, einen vorderen Anschlag 252 bildende Platte auf, welche einen Mittelbereich 253 des Führungselements 250 nach vorne hin abgegrenzt. Dieser Mittelbereich 253 ist plattenförmig und horizontal ausgerichtet. Er weist beidseitig je einen Arm 254.1, 254.1 auf, welche von vorne her seitlich nach hinten aussen gerichtet sind. Auf dem Mittelbereich 253 ist die Zwangssteuerung 220 in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar gelagert. Dabei ist sie zwischen dem vorderen Anschlag 252 und der zweiten vertikalen Achse 249 geführt und entsprechend an einer Bewegung in Skilängsrichtung relativ zum Führungselement 250 gehindert.In front of the
Wie hier in der Explosionszeichnung ersichtlich, umfasst die Zwangssteuerung 220 zwei Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2, ein Schwenkelement 220.3 und einen Schlitten 220.4. Der Schlitten 220.4 ist zwischen dem Führungselement 250 unten und dem Gehäuse 202 oben sowie vorne und hinten in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar gelagert. Er umfasst eine im Wesentlichen flache, horizontal ausgerichtete, obere Fläche sowie vorne und hinten je eine im Wesentlichen vertikal in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete Fläche. Daher weist ein vertikaler Querschnitt in Skilängsrichtung durch den Schlitten 220.4 eine nach unten offene, oben abgeflachte, n-förmige Form auf. Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 201 ist das Schwenkelement 220.3 von hinten her unter die obere Fläche des Schlittens 220.4 reichend angeordnet. Dabei ist das Schwenkelement 220.3 in seinem vorderen Bereich durch eine erste vertikale Achse 248 in einer horizontalen Ebene schwenkbar und in Skilängsrichtung bewegbar am Schlitten 220.4 gelagert. Um die Schwenkbewegung des Schwenkelements 220.3 zu erleichtern, weist die erste vertikale Achse 248 eine die erste vertikale Achse 248 umlaufende Rolle auf. In Skiquerrichtung gesehen beidseitig des Schwenkelements 220.3 ist je einer der beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 unterhalb der oberen Fläche des Schlittens 220.4 in Skiquerrichtung verschiebbar am Schlitten 220.4 gelagert. Zusätzlich sind die beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 je durch eine zweite Kulissenführung 221.1, 221.2 im Schwenkelement 220.3 mit einem darin gelagerten, am entsprechenden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 angeordneten, zweiten Kulissenstein 222.1, 222.2 am Schwenkelement 220.3 gelagert. Diese beiden zweiten Kulissensteine 222.1, 222.2 umfassen je eine Rolle, welche den zylinderförmigen Kern des entsprechenden zweiten Kulissensteins 222.1, 222.2 umschliesst. Diese Rollen dienen dazu, dass die zweiten Kulissensteine 222.1, 222.2 mit weniger Reibungsverlusten in der entsprechenden zweiten Kulissenführung 221.1, 221.2 bewegt werden können.As can be seen in the exploded view, the forced
Die zweiten Kulissenführungen 221.1, 221.2 sind derart angeordnet, dass sie eine Bewegung des Schwenkelements 220.3 in Skilängsrichtung relativ zur restlichen Zwangssteuerung 220 und somit den Seitenhebeln 220.1, 220.2 sowie eine Drehbewegung des Schwenkelements 220.3 relativ zur restlichen Zwangssteuerung 220 und somit den Seitenhebeln 220.1, 220.2 erlauben. Bei einer Drehbewegung des Schwenkelements 220.3 werden die beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 im gleichen Abstand zueinander gehalten, während sie durch eine Relativbewegung in Skilängsrichtung auseinandergestossen bzw. zusammengezogen werden. Das Zusammenziehen wird dabei von den beiden Armen 254.1, 254.2 des Mittelbereichs 253 des Führungselements 250 unterstützt, welche ebenfalls mit den zweiten Kulissensteinen 222.1, 222.2 zusammenwirken können, wenn das Führungselement 250 nach hinten verschoben wird.The second link guides 221.1, 221.2 are arranged in such a way that they allow a movement of the pivoting element 220.3 in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the rest of the forced
An den beiden seitlichen Enden des Schlittens 220.4 ist in einem oberen Bereich je einer der beiden Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 um eine Achse 209.1, 209.2 schwenkbar gelagert. Diese beiden Achsen 209.1, 209.2 sind in einer sl<iparallelen Ebene angeordnet, wobei zwei Geraden, welche durch die beiden Achsen 209.1, 209.2 definiert sind, beinahe skiparallel ausgerichtet sind und gegen hinten in einem Winkel von etwa 6 Grad aufeinander zu laufen. In einem unteren Bereich unterhalb der Achsen 209.1, 209.3 sind die beiden Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 an äusseren Enden der Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 gelagert. Dazu weisen die beiden Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 an ihren unteren Enden je einen ersten Kulissenstein 224.1, 224.2 auf, welcher jeweils einen zylinderförmigen Querschnitt aufweist und parallel zur Achse 209.1, 209.3 des entsprechend Hebels 205.1, 205.1 ausgerichtet ist. Diese beiden ersten Kulissensteine 224.1, 224.2 sind in der Festhaltestellung sowie in der Freigabestellung jeweils je in einer ersten Kulissenführung 223.1, 223.2 des entsprechenden Seitenhebels 220.1, 220.2 gelagert.At the two lateral ends of the slide 220.4, in an upper area, one of the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 is mounted so as to be pivotable about an axis 209.1, 209.2. These two axes 209.1, 209.2 are arranged in a plane parallel to the slide, with two straight lines defined by the two axes 209.1, 209.2 being aligned almost parallel to the ski and converging towards the rear at an angle of approximately 6 degrees. In a lower area below the axes 209.1, 209.3, the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are mounted on the outer ends of the side levers 220.1, 220.2. For this purpose, the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 each have a first sliding block 224.1, 224.2 at their lower ends, which each has a cylindrical cross-section and is aligned parallel to the axis 209.1, 209.3 of the corresponding lever 205.1, 205.1. These two first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are each mounted in a first sliding block guide 223.1, 223.2 of the corresponding side lever 220.1, 220.2 in the holding position and in the release position.
An seiner vorderen, oberen Seitenkante weist der Schlitten 220.4 zwei Einschnitte 227.1, 227.2 auf. In diese beiden Einschnitte 227.1, 227.2 können zwei am Steuerhebel 203 angebrachte Riegel 228.1, 228.2 eingreifen. Dadurch kann der Schlitten 220.4 in der Blocl<ierstellung an einer Bewegung in Skiquerrichtung gehindert werden.The carriage 220.4 has two notches 227.1, 227.2 on its front, upper side edge. Two latches 228.1, 228.2 attached to the
Wenn sich der Frontautomat 201 in der Festhaltestellung befindet, kann der Schlitten 220.4 in Skiquerrichtung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden. Dabei werden auch die beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 und die beiden Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 mit dem Schlitten 220.4 mitbewegt. Gleichzeitig wird zudem das Schwenkelement 220.3, welches in seinem vordern Bereich durch der ersten Achse 248 am Schlitten 220.4 und in seinem hinteren Bereich durch die zweite Achse 249 am Führungselement 250 gelagert ist, entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs geschwenkt. Dadurch werden die beiden zweiten Kulissensteine 222.1, 222.2 in den zweiten Kulissenführungen 221.1, 221.2 bewegt, wobei die beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 in einem gleichen Abstand zueinander gehalten werden.When the front
Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 201 ist die Spiralfeder 236 zwischen dem I<olben 235 und der Sperrmutter 237 vorgespannt. Nach hinten ist sie über die Sperrmutter 237 und die Stellschraube 238 auf einer Innenseite des Gehäuses 202 abgestützt. Durch Drehen der Stellschraube 238, wodurch die Sperrmutter 237 nach vorne oder hinten bewegt wird, kann dabei die Vorspannung der Spiralfeder 236 eingestellt werden. Entsprechend drückt die Spiralfeder 236 den I<olben 235 mit einer einstellbaren Kraft nach vorne, wo der I<olben 235 gegen das Schwenkelement 220.3 abgestützt ist. Dazu weist der I<olben 235 ein vorderes Ende mit zwei seitlich abgefasten, vertikal ausgerichteten Flächen auf, welche in eine v-förmige Einbuchtung im hinteren Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3 passen. Wenn sich der Schlitten 220.4 in einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs befindet, so ist das Schwenkelement 220.3 in Skilängsrichtung ausgerichtet und der I<olben 235 drückt in die v-förmige Einbuchtung im hinteren Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3. Wenn der Schlitten 220.4 seitlich entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt wird, so wird das Schwenkelement 220.3 wie beschrieben seitlich geschwenkt. Dadurch wird auch die v-förmige Einbuchtung im hinteren Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3 mitgeschwenkt, wobei eine Flanke der v-förmigen Einbuchtung, welche in Bewegungsrichtung der Zwangssteuerung 220 liegt, gegen den I<olben 235 gedrückt wird. Dadurch wird der I<olben 235 nach hinten gedrückt und es wird eine rücktreibende Kraft auf das Schwenkelement 220.3 ausgeübt, welche das Schwenkelement 220.3 in eine Ausrichtung parallel zur Skilängsrichtung und den Schlitten 220.4 in eine mittige Position des Zwangssteuerungswegs zurücl<treibt. Deshalb kann durch Einstellen der Vorspannung der Spiralfeder 236 die Stärke der rücktreibenden Kraft eingestellt werden.When the front
Die
Weiter ist in den vergrösserten Ausschnitten der
Im montierten Zustand sind die zylinderförmigen ersten Kulissensteine 224.1, 224.2 sowohl in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Freigabestellung in den Haken der ersten Kulissenführungen 223.1, 223.2 gelagert. Gleichzeitig sind auch die Anschläge 218.1, 218.2 der Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 gegenüber der Anschläge 219.1, 219.2 der Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 angeordnet. Entsprechend bewirkt in der Festhaltestellung und in der Freigabestellung eine von der Skimitte her nach aussen wirkende Kraft auf einen der Haltesporne 206.1, 206.2 ein Drehmoment auf die an den Achsen 209.1, 209.2 gelagerten Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2, wodurch die unteren Bereiche der Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 zur Skimitte hin gedrückt werden. Dabei werden die Anschläge 218.1, 218.2 der Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 gegen die Anschläge 219.1, 219.2 der Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 gedrückt und die Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 können durch die Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.1 an einer Schwenkbewegung gehindert werden.In the assembled state, the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are mounted in the hooks of the first sliding block guides 223.1, 223.2 both in the holding position and in the release position. At the same time, the stops 218.1, 218.2 of the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are arranged opposite the stops 219.1, 219.2 of the side levers 220.1, 220.2. Accordingly, in the holding position and In the release position, a force acting outwards from the center of the ski on one of the retaining spurs 206.1, 206.2 creates a torque on the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 mounted on the axes 209.1, 209.2, whereby the lower areas of the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are pressed towards the center of the ski. The stops 218.1, 218.2 of the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are pressed against the stops 219.1, 219.2 of the side levers 220.1, 220.2 and the pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 can be prevented from pivoting by the side levers 220.1, 220.1.
In
Die
In
Weiter zeigt
Die
Auch in
Die
In
Um den Abstand zwischen den beiden zweiten Kulissensteinen 222.1, 222.2 und damit den Haltespornen 206.1, 206.2 auch während einer Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung 220 entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs und einer damit verbundenen Schwenkbewegung des Schenl<elements 220.3 konstant zu halten, laufen die beiden zweiten Kulissenführungen 221.1, 221.2 von hinten gegen vorne in gekrümmter Form aufeinander zu. Dabei reichen sie beidseitig der ersten vertikalen Achse 248 angeordnet von hinter der ersten vertikalen Achse 248 bis vor die erste vertikale Achse 248. Wenn das Schwenkelement 220.3 wie in
Die
In
Diese Bewegung des Seitenhebels 220.1 und des Schwenkhebels 205.1 wird im Falle einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung durch eine seitwärtsgerichtete Kraft angetrieben, welche auf den im Frontautomaten 201 gehaltenen Skischuh wirkt. Das heisst, dass bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung zuerst der im Frontautomaten 201 gehaltene Skischuh in Skiquerrichtung gedrückt wird, wodurch der Schlitten 220.4 bis an ein Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt wird. Während dieser Bewegung bleibt der Skischuh im Schlitten 220.4 gehalten, wobei durch die Bewegung des Schlittens 220.4 und der Zwangssteuerung 220 gegen die rücktreibende Kraft der Spiralfeder 236 Energie aufgenommen wird. Wenn die Energie eines Stosses grösser als die derart durch den Frontautomaten 201 aufnehmbare Energie ist, so bewirkt der Skischuh auch am Ende des dynamischen Wegs angelangt noch eine Kraft auf den in Bewegungsrichtung liegenden Schwenkhebel 205.1. Weil der zu diesem Schwenkhebel 205.1 gehörende Seitenhebel 220.1 am Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs vom Schwenkelement 220.3 zur Skimitte hin freigegeben ist, kann der Schwenkhebel 205.1 vom Skischuh weiter zur Seite weggedrückt werden. Wenn der der Schwenkhebel 205.1 derart weggedrückt wird, so ist anfangs der Skischuh durch den Haltesporn 206.1 noch in der Lagerbuchse im Skischuh gehalten. Sobald der Schwenkhebel 205.1 aber einen gewissen Schwenkwinkel erreicht hat, beginnt die Steuerbacl<e 208.1 des Schwenkhebels 205.1 mit der Sohle des Skischuhs zusammenzuwirken, wodurch der Haltesporn 206.1 aus der Lagerbuchse des Skischuhs befreit und der Skischuh entsprechend freigegeben wird.In the event of a lateral safety release, this movement of the side lever 220.1 and the pivot lever 205.1 is driven by a sideways force which acts on the ski boot held in the front
Während dieser Schwenkbewegung des Schwenkhebels 205.1 wird zudem auch der zweite Kulissenstein 222.1 des Seitenhebels 220.1 in die v-förmige Einbuchtung am vorderen Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3 gedrückt. Dieser Mechanismus hat den Effekt, dass der zweite Kulissenstein 222.1 durch seine Positionierung in der v-förmigen Einbuchtung am vorderen Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3 ein Zurückschnappen des Schwenkelements 220.3 in eine Ausrichtung parallel zur Skilängsrichtung verhindert. Entsprechend ist in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung die aus dem Schlitten 220.4, den beiden Seitenhebeln 220.1, 220.2 und dem Schwenkelement 220.3 bestehende Zwangssteuerung 220 blockiert. Trotz dieser Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung 220 ist aber der seitlich weggeschwenkte Schwenkhebel 205.1 frei zwischen einer seitlich weggeschwenkten Stellung und einer beinahe aufgerichteten Stellung schwenkbar.During this pivoting movement of the pivot lever 205.1, the second sliding block 222.1 of the side lever 220.1 is also pressed into the V-shaped recess at the front end of the pivot element 220.3. This mechanism has the effect that the second sliding block 222.1, due to its positioning in the V-shaped recess at the front end of the pivot element 220.3, prevents the pivot element 220.3 from snapping back into an orientation parallel to the longitudinal direction of the ski. Accordingly, in the safety release position, the forced
Um den Frontautomaten 201 von der Sicherheitsauslösestellung zurück in die Festhaltestellung zu bringen, reicht es aus, den seitlich weggeschwenkten Schwenkhebel 205.1 aufzurichten. Dadurch wird unterhalb der Achse 209.1 der zylinderförmige, erste Kulissenstein 224.1 nach unten geschwenkt, wo er auf den Haken der entsprechenden ersten Kulissenführung 223.1 trifft und durch ein Zusammenwirken mit diesem Haken den Seitenhebel 220.1 seitwärts von der Skimitte wegzieht. Damit wird auch der zweite Kulissenstein 222.1 dieses Seitenhebels 220.1 aus der v-förmigen Einbuchtung am vorderen Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3 herausgezogen, wodurch das Schwenkelement 220.3 freigegeben wird. Sobald das Schwenkelement 220.3 derart freigegeben ist, kann das Schwenkelement 220.3 und die ganze Zwangssteuerung 220 durch die rücktreibende Kraft, welche durch die Spiralfeder 236 bewirkt wird, zurück zur Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden.To bring the front
Die
In der
Wenn der Frontautomat 201 durch Betätigung des Steuerhebels 203 in die Freigabestellung gebracht wird und die beiden Blöcke 210 nach hinten bewegt werden, drücken die Blöcke 210 nicht nur das Führungselement 250 nach hinten. Sie drücken zudem auch in ihrem hinteren, oberen Bereich gegen einen unterhalb der Skiquerachse 207 angeordneten Anschlag 211 am Trittsporn 204, wodurch das freie Ende des Trittsporns 204 nach oben geschwenkt wird. Wenn nun ein Skischuh in den Frontautomaten 201 eingespannt werden soll, so genügt es, den Skischuh in Skilängsrichtung richtig positioniert auf den Frontautomaten 201 abzusenken. Sobald die Sohle des Skischuhs das freie Ende des Trittsporns 204 nach unten drückt, werden über den Anschlag 211 die Blöcke 210 nach hinten gedrückt. Dabei reicht der Druck auf die Blöcke 210 aus, dass sie über die Wölbung auf der vorderen Seite des Anschlags 252 des Führungselements 250 bewegt werden, wodurch das Führungselement 250 nach vorne freigegeben wird und durch die Spiralfeder 236 nach vorne bewegt werden kann. Durch diese Bewegung des Führungselements 250 werden über den Anschlag 252 auch die Blöcke 210 weiter nach vorne bewegt und der Steuerhebel 203 wird in eine Position geschwenkt, in welcher sein freies Ende etwas nach schräg vorne oben zeigt. Zudem wird durch die Bewegung des Führungselements 250 auch das Schwenkelement 220.3 nach vorne bewegt, wodurch die beiden Schwenkhebel zusammengeschenl<t werden. Entsprechend wird dadurch der Frontautomat 201 in die Festhaltestellung überführt, in welcher der Skischuh in den Haltespornen gehalten wird.When the
Die
Die
Die
Im Gegensatz zu den bisher gezeigten Figuren illustriert die Figurabfolge 24a, 24b und 24c, wie das Schwenkelement 220.3 in der Freigabestellung, der Festhaltestellung, sowie der Blocl<ierstellung in Skilängsrichtung positioniert ist. So ist in der
Gleichzeitig wird in der Blocl<ierstellung auch der Schlitten 220 in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs blockiert. Wie in
Weiter ist in den Querschnittsdarstellungen der
Insbesondere in den Querschnittsdarstellungen wie beispielsweise den
Aus diesen Gründen ist der Frontautomat 201 optimiert für eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung bei einem Tourensl<ibindungssystem, bei welchem der Fersenautomat keine seitliche Sicherheitsauslösung ermöglicht. So wird der Skischuh bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung um eine Vertikalachse gedreht, bis er aus dem Frontautomat 201 gelöst ist. Dabei verläuft aufgrund der Ausrichtung der Achsen 209.1, 209.2 die Schwenkbewegung des in Bewegungsrichtung liegenden Schwenkhebels 205.1, 205.2 senkrecht zur Bewegungsrichtung des Skischuhs. Entsprechend ist die Ausrichtung der Achsen 209.1, 209.2 für eine Drehbewegung des Skischuhs bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslösung optimiert.For these reasons, the front
Diese Optimierung hat zudem zur Folge, dass der Schlitten 220.4 gekrümmt ist und die beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 der Zwangssteuerung 220 nicht entlang einer rechtwinklig zur Skilängsachse verlaufenden Geraden ausgerichtet sind, sondern je rechtwinklig zur entsprechenden Achse 209.1, 209.2 ausgerichtet im Schlitten 220.4 verschiebbar gelagert sind.This optimization also results in the carriage 220.4 being curved and the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 of the forced
Der hier gezeigte Frontautomat 301 ist sehr ähnlich wie der Frontautomat 201 konstruiert, welcher in den
Im Gegensatz zum Frontautomaten 201, welcher in den
Weiter umfasst das Schwenkelement 320.3 im Gegensatz zum Schwenkelement 220.3 des Frontautomaten 201 nicht beidseitig je einen Arm. Entsprechend umschliessen die zweiten Kulissenführungen 321.1, 321.2 am Schwenkelement 320.3 die zweiten Kulissensteine 322.1, 322.2 nicht, sondern stützen die zweiten Kulissensteine 322.1, 322.2 nur gegen eine Bewegung zur Skimitte hin ab. Diese einseitige Abstützung ist auch bei den ersten Kulissenführungen 323.1, 323.2 und den ersten Kulissensteine 324.1, 324.2 gegeben. So umfassen die Seitenhebel 320.1, 320.2 an ihren von der Skimitte abgewanden Seiten zwar je eine erste Kulissenführung 323.1, 323.2. Im Gegensatz zu den ersten Kulissenführungen 223.1, 223.2 der Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 des Frontautomaten 201 umfassen die ersten Kulissenführungen 323.1, 323.2 des hier gezeigten Frontautomaten 301 aber keine Haken, sondern einzig je einen Anschlag 319.1, 319.2, gegen welchen die aus einem gegenseitigen Anschlag 318.1, 318.2 bestehenden ersten Kulissensteine 324.1, 324.2 anstehen. Um die ersten Kulissensteine 324.1, 324.2 gegen die ersten Kulissenführungen 323.1, 323.2 und die zweiten Kulissensteine 322.1, 322.2 gegen die zweiten Kulissensteine 321.1, 321.2 zu drücken, umfasst der hier gezeigte Frontautomat 301 zwei Schenkelfedern 329.1, 329.2 (siehe hierzu auch
Selbstverständlich bestehen auch Variationsmöglichkeiten zu dieser Ausführung des Frontautomaten 301. So können beispielsweise die beiden Schenkelfedern 329.1, 329.2 nur am Schlitten 320.4 und am jeweiligen Schwenkhebel 305.1, 305.2 abgestützt sein. Die beiden Schenkelfedern 329.1, 329.2 können aber auch anderswo und andersartig abgestützt sein und können auch durch ein andersartiges elastisches Element ersetzt werden, welches eine Zug- oder eine Druckkraft ausüben kann. Weiter besteht die Möglichkeit, dass je Seite der jeweilige Schwenkhebel 305.1, 305.2 durch ein erstes elastisches Element gegen den entsprechenden Seitenhebel 320.1, 320.2 gedrückt oder gezogen wird, während der jeweilige Seitenhebel 320.1, 320.2 durch ein zweites elastisches Element zur Skimitte hin gedrückt wird oder gezogen wird.Of course, there are also possible variations to this design of the front
In der Explosionszeichnung in
Die
Im vergrösserten Ausschnitt der Explosionszeichnung in
Die
Da es sich bei den in den
In einer Variante zum in den
Der in
Ein erster wesentlicher Unterschied zum in den
Ein zweiter wesentlicher Unterschied zwischen dem hier gezeigten Frontautomaten 401 und dem in den
Ein dritter wesentlicher Unterschied zwischen dem hier gezeigten Frontautomaten 401 und den in den
Die
Wenn sich der Frontautomat 401 wie in der
Wenn sich der Frontautomat 401 hingegen wie in der
Im Gegensatz zur
In der
Sowohl in der Freigabestellung, in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Sicherheitsauslösestellung können die Schwenkhebel 405.1, 405.2 gegen die Federkraft der Schenkelfedern 429.1, 429.2 mit den Haltespornen zur Skimitte hing geschwenkt werden. Falls daher ein SI<i mit dem Frontautomaten 401 umfällt und mit einem Schwenkhebel 405.1, 405.2 aufschlägt, kann der entsprechende Schwenkhebel 405.1, 405.2 zur Skimitte hin nach innen geschwenkt werden, wodurch die Gefahr einer Beschädigung des Frontautomaten 401 reduziert ist.Both in the release position, in the holding position and in the safety release position, the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 can be pivoted against the spring force of the leg springs 429.1, 429.2 with the holding spurs towards the middle of the ski. If a ski with the front
In den
In der
Um den Frontautomaten 401 von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung zu bewegen, kann der Steuerhebel 403 etwas nach oben gezogen werden. Dies genügt, um die Rasteinheit 408 von der Rastposition am Kopf 441 des Schwenkelements 420.3 zu lösen. Sobald die Rasteinheit 408 von der Rastposition gelöst ist, wird die Rasteinheit 408 durch die Spiralfeder 436 zusammen mit dem Schwenkelement 420.3 und dem I<olben 435 nach vorne bewegt. Dies führt dazu, dass der Steuerhebel 403 mit seinem freien Ende nach oben geschwenkt und in die Festhalteposition überführt wird. Als Variante dazu kann zur Überführung des Frontautomaten 401 in die Festhaltestellung aber auch der aus einem Basiselement 404.1 und einem Drahtbügel 404.2 bestehende Trittsporn nach unten gedrückt werden. Falls der Trittsporn nach unten gedrückt wird, so wird das Basiselement 404.1 des Trittsporns um die Skiquerachse 407 geschwenkt. Dabei wird der Steuerhebel 403 durch einen Anschlag 410 des Basiselements 404.1, welcher an einem Gegenstück des Steuerhebels 403 ansteht, mitbewegt. Dadurch wird ebenfalls die Rasteinheit 408 von der Rastposition am Kopf 441 des Schwenkelements 420.3 gelöst, wonach der Steuerhebel 403 durch die Spiralfeder 436 in die Festhalteposition und der Frontautomat 401 in die Festhaltestellung bewegt wird.In order to move the
In der
Da sich die Rasteinheit 408 des Steuerhebels 403 in der Festhaltestellung weiter vorne als in der Freigabestellung befindet, ist vor dem Kopf 441 des Schwenkelements 420.3 durch das nach vorne bewegte hintere Ende der Rasteinheit 408 Platz freigegeben. Dadurch ist das Schwenkelement 420.3 wie bereits im Zusammenhang mit den
Weiter ist in der Festhaltestellung nebst dem Steuerhebel 403 auch das Basiselement 404.1 des Trittsporns um die Skiquerachse 407 geschwenkt, sodass das Bügelelement 404.2 des Trittsporns auf das Gehäuse 402 des Frontautomaten 401 abgesenkt ist.Furthermore, in the holding position, in addition to the
In der
In einer Variante zum in den
In einer weiteren Variante zum in den
Ein erster wesentlicher Unterschied zwischen dem hier gezeigten Frontautomaten 501 und dem Frontautomaten 401, welcher in den
Ein zweiter wesentlicher Unterschied zwischen dem hier gezeigten Frontautomaten 501 und dem Frontautomaten 401, welcher in den
In einer Variante zum in der
Selbstverständlich beschränkt sich die Erfindung nicht auf die oben beschriebenen Ausführungsbeispiele des Frontautomaten 1 und der vier weiteren Frontautomaten 201, 301, 401 und 501. Es sind diverse weitere Ausführungen möglich. So können beispielsweise Merkmale der Frontautomaten 1, 201, 301, 401 und 501 beliebig kombiniert werden. So können beispielsweise die Frontautomaten 401, 501 anstelle der Dämpferstellung auch eine Blocl<ierstellung oder weder eine Dämpferstellung noch eine Blocl<ierstellung aufweisen. Genauso können auch die Frontautomaten 1, 201 und 301 anstelle der Blocl<ierstellung eine Dämpferstellung oder weder eine Dämpferstellung noch eine Blocl<ierstellung aufweisen.Of course, the invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments of the
Unabhängig von solchen Kombinationen können beispielsweise sowohl die ersten als auch die zweiten Kulissenführungen durch andere Führungen ersetzt werden. Eine Möglichkeit dazu ist, dass Schwalbenschwanzführungen mit einem darauf geführten Schlitten eingesetzt werden. Weiter können auch die ersten Kulissenführungen nicht an der Zwangssteuerung, sondern am Gehäuse des Frontautomaten angeordnet sein. Im Fall des Frontautomaten 1 können dabei die beiden Achsen an der Zwangssteuerung anstelle des Gehäuses angeordnet sein. Weiter kann im Fall des Frontautomaten 1 auch die Lagerung der beiden Schwenkhebel an der Zwangssteuerung unterhalb der Achsen angeordnet sein, um welche die Schwenkhebel schwenkbar sind.Regardless of such combinations, both the first and the second guide rails can be replaced by other guides. One possibility is to use dovetail guides with a carriage guided on them. Furthermore, the first guide rails can be arranged not on the positive control but on the housing of the front machine. In the case of the
Im Fall der weiteren Frontautomaten 201, 301, 401 und 501 hingegen kann beispielweise das Wegschwenken des in Bewegungsrichtung liegenden Schwenkhebels dadurch erreicht werden, dass am Gehäuse des Frontautomaten eine Führung für die Schwenkhebel angeordnet ist, welche den entsprechenden Schwenkhebel freigibt, sobald das Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs erreicht ist. Es ist aber auch denkbar, dass die Zwangssteuerung am Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs an ein Hindernis anstösst, wodurch ein Freigabemechanismus an der Zwangssteuerung betätigt wird, welcher den entsprechenden Hebel für eine Schwenkbewegung freigibt.In the case of the other
Die Erfindung beschränkt sich nicht auf diese Varianten des Frontautomaten. Es sind auch weitere Ausführungsformen möglich.The invention is not limited to these variants of the front vending machine. Other embodiments are also possible.
Zusammenfassend ist festzustellen, dass ein Frontautomat geschaffen wird, welcher die Sicherheit für einen Skiläufer erhöht.In summary, it can be stated that a front automatic device is created which increases the safety for a skier.
Claims (15)
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) for a touring sl<ibinding, having two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) which are arranged laterally as viewed in the longitudinal direction of the ski and are opposite one another, each having a holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306. 2, 406.1, 406.2) for holding a sl<iboot (100) in a toe region of the sl<iboot (100), wherein the holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306.2, 406.1, 406.2) are pins which are arranged on the respective lever (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405. 2) in such a way that, starting from the respective lever (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405. 2) with one free end pointing towards the center of the ski, wherein the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) are each pivotably mounted about an axis (9.1, 9.2, 209.1, 209.2, 409.1, 409. 2) in such a way that the holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306.2, 406.1, 406.2) are moved in a transverse direction of the ski when the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) are each pivoted about these axes (9.1, 9.2, 209.1, 209.2, 405.1, 405.2) in a transverse skiing direction, whereina. the frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) has an opening state in which the two holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306.2, 406.1, 406.2) are located at a first distance from one another,b. the frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) has a retaining state in which the two holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.1, 306.1, 306.2, 406.1, 406.2) are located at a second distance from one another, which is smaller than the first distance, andc. the frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) has a safety release state,characterized by a positive control (20, 220, 320, 420) on which the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) are mounted in the retaining state, so that the two levers (5. 1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) can be moved in a coupled manner in the transverse direction of the ski within a dynamic range and the two holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306.2, 406.1, 406. 2) are moved coupled at a second distance from each other on a dynamic path in the transverse direction of the ski, whereby a sl<iboot (100) held in the frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) together with the two holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306.2, 406. 1, 406.2) in the retaining state can be moved along the dynamic path in the transverse direction of the ski, as a result of which energy can be absorbed by the frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) without the sl<iboot (100) being released from the frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401).
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) according to claim 1, characterized in that the axes (9.1, 9.2, 209.1, 209.2, 409.1, 409.2) of the levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) are arranged in a plane parallel to the ski.
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that both levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) each comprise a control jaw (8.1, 8.2, 208.1, 208.2) on a side facing the center of the ski for interacting with a sl<iboot (100).
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) according to one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that the positive control (20, 220, 320, 420) is movable along a positive control path in the retaining state, whereby the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) are movable in a coupled manner within the dynamic range.
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) according to claim 4, characterized in that the positive control (20, 220, 320, 420) can be pressed with a force towards the center of the positive control path by a prestressed, elastic element (36, 236, 336, 436) in the event of a deviation from a center of the positive control path.
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) according to one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that the frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) has a safety release state and in that the two levers (5. 1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) can be moved in the retaining state to an end of the dynamic range where the one of the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405. 2), which comprises the holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306.2, 406.1, 406.2), which is moved away from the ski center on the dynamic path, can be released by the positive control (20, 220, 320, 420) and can be moved away from the other of the two levers (5. 1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2), whereby the frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) can be brought from the retaining state into the safety release state.
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) according to claim 6, characterized in that in the retaining state the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405. 2) are each mounted on the positive control (20, 220, 320, 420) by a first link guide (23.1, 23.2, 223.1, 223.2, 323.1, 323.2, 440.1, 440.2) and a first link block (24.1, 24.2, 224.1, 224.2, 324.1, 324.2, 412.1, 412. 2) and that in the safety release state at least one of the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405. 2) is released in that the corresponding first sliding block (24.1, 24.2, 224.1, 224.2, 324.1, 324.2, 412.1, 412.2) is released from the corresponding first positive control (23.1, 23.2, 223.1, 223.2, 323.1, 323.2, 440.1, 440.2).
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) according to one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405. 2) are mounted on the positive control (20, 220, 320, 420), such that, in the opening state, the holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306.2, 406.1, 406.2) of the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) are located at the first distance from one another.
- Frontal automat (201, 301, 401) according to claim 8, characterized in that the positive control (220, 320, 420) comprises a control element (220.3, 320.3, 420.3) on which the two levers (205. 1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) are mounted, the control element (220.3, 320.3, 420.3) being movable in such a way that, in the opening state, the two levers (205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405. 2) are moved apart and the holding means (206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306.2, 406.1, 406.2) are at the first distance from each other and that in the retaining state the two levers (205. 1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2, 405.1, 405.2) are moved together and the holding means (206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306.2, 406.1, 406.2) are at the second distance from each other.
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301) according to claim 8 or 9, characterized in that the positive control (20, 220, 320) comprises two elements (20.1, 20.2, 220.1, 220.2, 320.1, 320.2), wherein one of the two levers (5.1, 205.1, 305. 1) is mounted on a first element (20.1, 220.1, 320.1) and the other of the two levers (5.2, 205.2, 305.2) is mounted on a second element (20.2, 220.2, 320.2), and wherein the first and second elements (20.1, 20.2, 220.1, 220.2, 320.1, 320. 2) are movable relative to one another in such a way that, in the opening state, the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2) are moved apart and the holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306. 2) are located at the first distance from each other and that, in the retaining state, the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2) are moved together and the holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.2, 306.1, 306.2) are located at the second distance from each other.
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301) according to claim 10, characterized in that the first element (20.1, 220.1, 320.1) and the second element (20.2, 220.2, 320.2) of the positive control (20, 220, 320) are each controlled by a second link guide (21. 1, 21.2, 221.1, 221.2, 321.1, 321.2) and a second link block (22.1, 22.2, 222.1, 222.2, 322.1, 322.2) on a third element (20.3, 220.3, 320.3) of the positive control (20, 220, 320).
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301) according to claim 11, characterized in that the third element (20.3, 220.3, 320.2) of the positive control (20, 220, 320) is movable along the longitudinal axis of the ski, whereina. when the third element (20.3, 220.3, 320.3) of the positive control (20, 220, 320) is moved in a first direction, the first and second elements (20.1, 20.2, 220.1, 220.2, 320.1, 320.2) of the positive control (20, 220, 320) are moved together by the second link guides (21.1, 21.2, 221.1, 221.2, 321.1, 321.2), andb. when the third element (20.3, 220.3, 320.3) of the positive control (20, 220, 320) is moved in a second direction, the first and second elements (20.1, 20.2, 220.1, 220.2, 320.1, 320.2) of the positive control (20, 220, 320) are moved apart by the second link guides (21.1, 21.2, 221.1, 221.2, 321.1, 321.2).
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301) according to one of claims 1 to 12, characterized in that the frontal automat (1, 201, 301) has a blocking position in which the two holding means (6.1, 6.2, 206.1, 206.2, 306. 1, 306.2) are located at a third distance from one another, which is equal to or smaller than the second distance and in which the two levers (5.1, 5.2, 205.1, 205.2, 305.1, 305.2) are blocked in their movement.
- Frontal automat (401) according to one of claims 1 to 12, characterized in that the frontal automat (401) has a damping position in which the two holding means (406.1, 406.2) are located at a third distance from each other, which is equal to or smaller than the second distance and in which the two levers (405.1, 405.2) can be moved within the dynamic range with higher resistance than in the retaining state.
- Frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) according to one of claims 1 to 14, characterized by a control lever (3, 203, 303, 403) which can be brought into a opening position and into a retaining position, wherein the frontal automat (1, 201, 301, 401) can be brought into the opening state by positioning the control lever (3, 203, 303, 403) into the opening position and into the retaining state by positioning the control lever (3, 203, 303, 403) into the retaining position.
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CH16052011A CH705586A2 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2011-09-29 | Front machine for ski binding e.g. touring, has levers that are mounted by positive control in retaining position, so that levers are coupled within dynamic range and can be moved in transverse direction |
CH00250/12A CH705579A2 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-02-27 | Front machine. |
EP12405102.0A EP2574379B1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
Related Parent Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP12405102.0A Division-Into EP2574379B1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
EP12405102.0A Division EP2574379B1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
EP3766550A1 EP3766550A1 (en) | 2021-01-20 |
EP3766550B1 true EP3766550B1 (en) | 2024-07-31 |
Family
ID=46980873
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP20192634.2A Active EP3766550B1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
EP12405102.0A Active EP2574379B1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP12405102.0A Active EP2574379B1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US9526973B2 (en) |
EP (2) | EP3766550B1 (en) |
CH (1) | CH705579A2 (en) |
Families Citing this family (20)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8439389B2 (en) | 2008-04-03 | 2013-05-14 | G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc. | Toe unit for alpine touring binding |
ITTO20110598A1 (en) * | 2011-07-07 | 2013-01-08 | Elmi S R L | TIP FOR SKI CONNECTION OR SNOWSHOES WITH MAGNETIC SELF-CENTERING SYSTEM |
DE102012206880A1 (en) | 2012-04-25 | 2013-10-31 | Salewa Sport Ag | Front unit for a board binding, in particular pivotable front unit with release arrangement |
ITBO20120645A1 (en) * | 2012-11-28 | 2014-05-29 | Atk Race Srl | DEVICE FOR THE REMOVABLE LOCKING OF THE CENTRAL-FRONT PART OF A SKIING BOOT AT THE SKI TABLE TO IMPLEMENT THE TELEMARK TECHNIQUE |
AT513964A3 (en) * | 2013-01-15 | 2019-10-15 | Rossignol Sa | ski binding |
FR3002460B1 (en) * | 2013-02-22 | 2017-08-25 | Rossignol Sa | TORSIONALLY AUTOMATIC TRIGGER STOP |
EP2813268A1 (en) | 2013-06-12 | 2014-12-17 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front automat |
DE102014109601A1 (en) | 2013-07-09 | 2015-01-15 | G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc. | Skibindungsferseneinheit |
DE102013220722A1 (en) * | 2013-10-14 | 2015-04-16 | Salewa Sport Ag | Gleitbrettbindung |
EP2929919B1 (en) * | 2014-04-09 | 2018-05-30 | Salomon S.A.S. | Ski binding |
FR3019755B1 (en) * | 2014-04-09 | 2018-01-05 | Salomon Sas | SKI FIXING |
EP2965791B1 (en) | 2014-07-08 | 2019-03-27 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front pin ski binding boot positioning unit |
EP3566754B1 (en) * | 2018-05-08 | 2022-08-17 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front skibinding |
IT201800009744A1 (en) * | 2018-10-24 | 2020-04-24 | Atk Race Srl | SKI ATTACHMENT TOE |
DE102020116389A1 (en) * | 2020-06-22 | 2021-12-23 | Salewa Sport Ag | Front unit for a touring binding |
EP3851174A1 (en) | 2020-01-16 | 2021-07-21 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front unit for a ski binding |
DE102020203281A1 (en) * | 2020-03-13 | 2021-09-16 | Salewa Sport Ag | FRONT UNIT FOR A SKI BINDING WITH AN ENTRY AID |
IT202000012502A1 (en) * | 2020-05-27 | 2021-11-27 | Atk Sports S R L | FRONT INSERT FOR SKI MOUNTAINEERING BOOTS, FOR ATTACHING THE BOOT TO A SKI MOUNTAINEERING BINDING |
NO20210025A1 (en) * | 2021-01-08 | 2022-07-11 | Rottefella As | Release mechanism for ski binding |
IT202100018380A1 (en) * | 2021-07-13 | 2023-01-13 | Atk Sports S R L | SKI BINDING TOE FOR SKI MOUNTAINEERING |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
FR2218912A1 (en) * | 1973-02-23 | 1974-09-20 | Salomon Georges P J | |
DE2706111A1 (en) * | 1977-02-14 | 1978-08-17 | Werner Froer | Safety ski binding for cross country run - has two hinged toe clamp levers forming shoe holding stirrup engaging counter-bearing in shoe |
EP0199098B1 (en) * | 1985-03-25 | 1990-02-28 | Fritz Dipl.-Ing. Barthel | Cross-country ski binding |
EP1393783B1 (en) * | 2002-08-22 | 2005-01-05 | Look Fixations S.A. | Fixation on the frontside for a sportarticle |
EP2626117B1 (en) * | 2012-02-07 | 2015-07-01 | Fritz Barthel | Front unit for a slide board binding, tour binding and ski-jump binding |
Family Cites Families (22)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
AT359892B (en) * | 1976-05-15 | 1980-12-10 | Wunder Kg Heinrich | SKI BINDING WITH A SECURITY RELEASE PART |
US4184696A (en) * | 1978-07-17 | 1980-01-22 | Settembre Richard J | Safety binding for touring skis |
US4348036A (en) * | 1980-08-19 | 1982-09-07 | Settembre Richard J | Safety binding for nordic skis |
DE3437725C2 (en) * | 1984-02-22 | 1986-04-03 | Heinrich Wunder GmbH & Co KG, 8060 Dachau | Front sole retention device |
US4913456A (en) * | 1986-06-05 | 1990-04-03 | Marker Deutschland Gmbh | Front-piece for a safety ski-binding |
CH673402A5 (en) | 1987-12-23 | 1990-03-15 | Marker Deutschland Gmbh | Ski-binding front jaw unit - has jaws extended beyond attachment points and detachably locked by stop |
FR2632537B1 (en) * | 1988-06-08 | 1991-12-06 | Salomon Sa | SECURITY FIXING FOR SKI |
DE4007667C1 (en) * | 1990-03-10 | 1991-06-20 | Silvretta - Sherpas Sportartikel Gmbh & Co Kg, 8047 Karlsfeld, De | |
AT402796B (en) | 1995-02-01 | 1997-08-25 | Fritschi Apparatebau | Ski binding |
US6105994A (en) * | 1997-04-09 | 2000-08-22 | Parris; James E. | Step-in binding having safety release mechanism for Telemark ski |
DE19727159A1 (en) | 1997-06-26 | 1999-01-07 | Marker Deutschland Gmbh | Releasable ski binding between boot toe and ski |
FR2786706B1 (en) * | 1998-12-08 | 2001-02-09 | Look Fixations Sa | SKI BINDING |
ITMI20051429A1 (en) | 2005-07-22 | 2007-01-23 | Ski Trab S R L | TIP FOR SKI ATTACHMENTS |
US8439389B2 (en) * | 2008-04-03 | 2013-05-14 | G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc. | Toe unit for alpine touring binding |
DE102010029647A1 (en) * | 2010-06-02 | 2011-12-08 | Salewa Sport Ag | touring binding |
NO20101289A1 (en) * | 2010-09-15 | 2012-03-16 | Rottefella As | Cross-country bonding, as well as a method for assembling said cross-country bonding |
ITTO20110598A1 (en) * | 2011-07-07 | 2013-01-08 | Elmi S R L | TIP FOR SKI CONNECTION OR SNOWSHOES WITH MAGNETIC SELF-CENTERING SYSTEM |
DE202011109616U1 (en) | 2011-12-28 | 2012-02-06 | Sepp Heumann | Safety binding system |
DE102012201816B4 (en) * | 2012-02-07 | 2022-10-20 | Fritz Barthel | Front unit for a gliding board binding having first and second engagement means |
DE102012209339B4 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2018-03-15 | Marker Deutschland Gmbh | Shoe-holding unit with damping |
ITBO20120645A1 (en) * | 2012-11-28 | 2014-05-29 | Atk Race Srl | DEVICE FOR THE REMOVABLE LOCKING OF THE CENTRAL-FRONT PART OF A SKIING BOOT AT THE SKI TABLE TO IMPLEMENT THE TELEMARK TECHNIQUE |
EP2929919B1 (en) * | 2014-04-09 | 2018-05-30 | Salomon S.A.S. | Ski binding |
-
2012
- 2012-02-27 CH CH00250/12A patent/CH705579A2/en unknown
- 2012-09-19 EP EP20192634.2A patent/EP3766550B1/en active Active
- 2012-09-19 US US13/622,861 patent/US9526973B2/en active Active
- 2012-09-19 EP EP12405102.0A patent/EP2574379B1/en active Active
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
FR2218912A1 (en) * | 1973-02-23 | 1974-09-20 | Salomon Georges P J | |
DE2706111A1 (en) * | 1977-02-14 | 1978-08-17 | Werner Froer | Safety ski binding for cross country run - has two hinged toe clamp levers forming shoe holding stirrup engaging counter-bearing in shoe |
EP0199098B1 (en) * | 1985-03-25 | 1990-02-28 | Fritz Dipl.-Ing. Barthel | Cross-country ski binding |
EP1393783B1 (en) * | 2002-08-22 | 2005-01-05 | Look Fixations S.A. | Fixation on the frontside for a sportarticle |
EP2626117B1 (en) * | 2012-02-07 | 2015-07-01 | Fritz Barthel | Front unit for a slide board binding, tour binding and ski-jump binding |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
EP2574379B1 (en) | 2020-09-30 |
US20130087992A1 (en) | 2013-04-11 |
EP2574379A3 (en) | 2014-12-31 |
US9526973B2 (en) | 2016-12-27 |
EP2574379A2 (en) | 2013-04-03 |
EP3766550A1 (en) | 2021-01-20 |
CH705579A2 (en) | 2013-04-15 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
EP3766550B1 (en) | Front device | |
EP2608853B1 (en) | Rear binding for touring with dynamic sliding range | |
EP3566754B1 (en) | Front skibinding | |
EP2926690B1 (en) | Mechanism for an office chair | |
EP2953508B1 (en) | Mechanism for an office chair | |
EP2705883B1 (en) | Automatic heel device for a ski binding | |
EP3702005B1 (en) | Heelholder | |
DE3605313C2 (en) | Safety ski binding that can be released from the side | |
EP3195906B1 (en) | Heel device with walk configuration | |
EP3345659B1 (en) | Automated heelholder device for a ski binding | |
EP3120903B1 (en) | Heel unit | |
EP3053632A1 (en) | Automatic heel mechanism | |
CH706664B1 (en) | Ski binding. | |
EP3332843B1 (en) | Heel unit for a gliding board binding with a brake assembly | |
DE102013224574B4 (en) | Heel unit for a touring binding and touring binding | |
CH705586A2 (en) | Front machine for ski binding e.g. touring, has levers that are mounted by positive control in retaining position, so that levers are coupled within dynamic range and can be moved in transverse direction | |
EP3851174A1 (en) | Front unit for a ski binding | |
DE2528578A1 (en) | SAFETY BINDING FOR SKI BOOTS | |
WO2000043085A1 (en) | Telemark ski binding | |
DE2701842A1 (en) | SKI BINDING WITH A MOVABLE PLATE TO ADD THE APPROPRIATE BOOT | |
DE2621758C3 (en) | Safety release part for ski bindings | |
EP3103525B1 (en) | Heel binding | |
EP2851108B1 (en) | Front jaw for ski binding | |
EP0547531B1 (en) | Front jaw | |
DE3008806C2 (en) |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
PUAI | Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION HAS BEEN PUBLISHED |
|
AC | Divisional application: reference to earlier application |
Ref document number: 2574379 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: P |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: A1 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE |
|
17P | Request for examination filed |
Effective date: 20210714 |
|
RBV | Designated contracting states (corrected) |
Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: EXAMINATION IS IN PROGRESS |
|
17Q | First examination report despatched |
Effective date: 20210901 |
|
GRAP | Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED |
|
INTG | Intention to grant announced |
Effective date: 20240422 |
|
GRAS | Grant fee paid |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR3 |
|
GRAA | (expected) grant |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009210 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: THE PATENT HAS BEEN GRANTED |
|
AC | Divisional application: reference to earlier application |
Ref document number: 2574379 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: P |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: B1 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: CH Ref legal event code: EP Ref country code: GB Ref legal event code: FG4D Free format text: NOT ENGLISH |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R096 Ref document number: 502012017269 Country of ref document: DE |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: IE Ref legal event code: FG4D Free format text: LANGUAGE OF EP DOCUMENT: GERMAN |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: DE Payment date: 20240816 Year of fee payment: 13 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: FR Payment date: 20240925 Year of fee payment: 13 |